Handleiding Red Epic - 2015 (pagina 10 van 225) (Engels)

597829

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/225

Pagina verder

EPIC | SCARLET | V6.0

RED DRAGON | MYSTERIUM-X | MONOCHROME

RED.COM

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE:

EPIC/SCARLET

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Disclaimer 3

Trademark Disclaimer 3

Compliance Statements 4

Safety Instructions 6

Battery Storage and Handling 7

Shipping Disclaimer 7

Chapter 1: EPIC/SCARLET Introduction 8

Read Before You Shoot 8

DSMC BRAIN 9

RED Digital Sensors 10

R3D File Format and REDCODE 11

Shoot For Video and Stills 12

Post Production with REDCINE-X PRO 12

HDRx and MAGIC MOTION 13

Additional Resources 13

Chapter 2: EPIC/SCARLET System Components 14

Additional Resources 14

BRAIN 15

DSMC Media Modules 16

REDMAG and RED MINI-MAG Systems 18

EPIC/SCARLET Adaptor Modules 19

Power Modules 21

RED Batteries and Chargers 22

Other DSMC Modules 22

Displays and Electronic Viewfinders 25

LEMO Adaptors 29

Camera Control Modules 30

Lens Mounts 33

Interchangeable OLPFs 34

Rails, Mounts, Tactical Gear, and Cables 34

Chapter 3: EPIC/SCARLET Basic Operations 35

Power Operations 35

Configure Your DSMC 36

Interchangeable OLPF System 44

Use a Tripod or Monopod 48

Video Monitor Outputs 49

Record 49

Chapter 4: Basic Menus and Controls 51

DSMC GUI Menu Introduction 51

Upper Status Row (Basic Menu) 52

Live Action Area 56

Lower Status Row 57

Navigation Controls 62

Chapter 5: Advanced Menus 69

DSMC Advanced Menus 69

Settings Menu 70

Media Menu 125

Playback Menu 126

Power Menu 129

HDRX Menu 130

Focus Menu 130

Exposure Assist 136

Presets Menu 138

Chapter 6: Record and Monitor Audio 141

Overview 141

Audio Data Path 141

Set Up Audio 142

Audio Input (Source) Options 142

Audio Output Options 145

Audio Meter (VU Meter) 146

Audio During Playback 147

Chapter 7: REDMOTE Operation 148

Overview 148

Controls, Connectors, and LEDs 149

REDMOTE Basics 151

REDMOTE LCD Display Menu 154

Upgrade REDMOTE Firmware 155

Chapter 8: Timecode, Genlock, Multi-Camera Setup 158

Timecode 158

Genlock 161

Master/Slave Operation 163

Set Up Stereo/3D Configuration 166

Set Up a Camera Array 167

Set Up Motion Control (MoCo) 169

Compatible Devices 171

Chapter 9: Upgrade DSMC Firmware 172

Verify Current Camera Firmware 172

Upgrade Camera Firmware 172

Chapter 10: DSMC Maintenance 174

BRAIN and Accessory Exterior Surfaces 174

Clean the Camera Sensor or OLPF 174

LCD and EVF Screens 175

Water Damage 175

Adjust Back Focus 175

Chapter 11: Troubleshoot Your DSMC 176

Perform a Stress Test 176

General Troubleshooting 176

Appendix A: Technical Specifications 184

EPIC DRAGON 184

SCARLET DRAGON 186

EPIC MYSTERIUM-X 188

SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X 189

BRAIN Dimensions 191

Appendix B: Input/Output Connectors 201

Record/Monitor Out Ports 202

Communication Ports 203

Audio Ports 207

Power Ports 208

SSD Module Connectors 208

Appendix C: Lens Mounts and Lenses 209

Lens Mounts 209

Lenses 212

Appendix D: Default Key Functions 219

Preset Default Key Functions 222

Appendix E: Menu Map 223

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DISCLAIMER

RED has made every effort to provide clear and accurate information

in these installation instructions, which are provided solely for the

user’s information. While thought to be accurate, the information in

this document is provided strictly “as is” and RED will not be held

responsible for issues arising from typographical errors or user’s

interpretation of the language used herein that is different from that

intended by RED. All safety and general information is subject to

change as a result of changes in local, federal or other applicable

laws.

RED reserves the right to revise this document and make changes

from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify

any person of such revisions or changes. In no event shall RED, its

employees or authorized agents be liable to you for any damages

or losses, direct or indirect, arising from the use of any technical or

operational information contained in this document.

For comments or questions about content in this Operation Guide,

please send a detailed email to OpsGuides@red.com.

All trademarks, trade names, logos, icons, images, written material,

code, and product names used in association with the accompa-

nying product are the copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual

property owned and controlled exclusively by RED.COM, INC.

TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER

All other company, brand, and product names are trademarks or

registered trademarks of their respective holders. RED has no affili-

ation to, is not associated with or sponsored by, and has no express

rights in third-party trademarks. Adobe is a registered trademark of

Adobe Systems Incorporated. AJA is a registered trademark of AJA

Video Systems, Inc. Cooke and S4/i are registered trademarks of

Cooke Optics Limited. DaVinci is a registered trademark of Black-

magic Design in the U.S. and other countries. Distagon and Otus

are registered trademarks of Carl Zeiss AG. Fujinon is a registered

trademark of FUJIFILM CORPORATION. HDMI is a registered trade-

mark of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other coun-

tries. Leica is a registered trademark of Leica Microsystems. Loctite

is a registered trademark of Henkel AG & Company KGaA. Nikkor

and Nikon are registered trademarks of Nikon Corporation. Canon

is a registered trademark of Canon, U.S.A. Apple, Macintosh, and

QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and

other countries. Windex is a registered trademark of S. C. Johnson

& Son, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Cor-

poration. LEMO is a registered trademark of LEMO USA. Sony is

a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. TORX is a registered

trademark of Acument Intellectual Properties, LLC in the United

States or other countries.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 4

COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS

INDUSTRIAL CANADA EMISSION COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS

standards RSS 139 and RSS 210. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada ap-

plicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est

autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est sus-

ceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.Cet appareil numéri-

que de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) STATE-

MENTS

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital de-

vice, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reason-

able protection against harmful interference

in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio fre-

quency energy and, if not installed and used

in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that inter-

ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment

does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more

of the following measures:

 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

In order to maintain compliance with FCC regulations, shielded

cables must be used with this equipment. Operation with non-ap-

proved equipment or unshielded cables is likely to result in interfer-

ence to radio and TV reception. The user is cautioned that changes

and modifications made to the equipment without the approval of

manufacturer could void the users authority to operate this equip-

ment.

NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operations subjected to the following two conditions (1) this device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including that may cause undesirable in-

terference.

CAUTION: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radia-

tion.

The device shall be used in such a manner that the potential for hu-

man contact is minimized

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set

forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be

installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between

the radiator and your body.

CAUTION: Regulations of the FCC and FAA

prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency

wireless devices because there signals could

interfere with critical aircraft instruments.

CAUTION: If the device is changed or modified

without permission from RED, the user may

void his or her authority to operate the equip-

ment.

AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND STATEMENTS

RED declares that the radio equipment described in this document

comply with the following international standards.

 IEC 60065 - Product Safety

 ETSI EN 300 328 - Technical requirement for radio equipment

RED declares digital devices described in this document comply

with the following Australian and New Zealand standards.

 AS/NZS CISPR 22 – Electromagnetic Interference

 AS/NZS 61000.3.2 – Power Line Harmonics

 AS/NZS 61000.3.3 – Power Line Flicker

JAPAN STATEMENTS

This is a Class B product based on the

standard of the Voluntary Control Council

for Interference (VCCI) for information tech-

nology equipment. If this equipment is used

near a radio or television receiver in a do-

mestic environment, it may cause radio in-

terference. Install and use the equipment

according to the instruction manual.

EUROPEAN UNION COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS

RED declares that the radio

equipment described in this

document comply with the

R&TTE Directive (1999/5/

EC) issued by the Commis-

sion of the European Com-

munity.

Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following

European Norms (in brackets are the equivalent international stan-

dards).

 EN 60065 (IEC 60065) – Product Safety

 ETSI EN 300 328 Technical requirement for radio equipment

 ETSI EN 301 489 General EMC requirements for radio equip-

ment.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

INFORMATION

Products with the CE marking comply with the EMC Directive

(2004/108/EC) and the Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) issued

by the Commission of the European Community. Compliance with

these directives implies conformity to the following European Prod-

uct Family Standards.

 EN 55022 (CISPR 22) – Electromagnetic Interference

 EN 55024-1 (CISPR 24) – Electromagnetic Immunity

 EN 61000-3-2 (IEC610000-3-2) – Power Line Harmonics

 EN 61000-3-3 (IEC610000) – Power Line Flicker

 EN 60065 (IEC60065) – Product Safety

WASTE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (WEEE)

The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-

ment (WEEE) mark applies only to countries

within the European Union (EU) and Norway.

This symbol on the product and accompany-

ing documents means that used electrical

and electronic products should not be mixed

with general household waste. For proper

treatment, recovery and recycling, please

take this product to designated collection

points where it will be accepted free of

charge. Alternatively, in some countries you

may be able to return your products to your

local retailer upon purchase of an equivalent

new product.

Disposing of this product correctly will help save valuable resources

and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the

environment, which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste

handling. Please contact your local authority for further details of

your nearest designated collection point. Penalties may be appli-

cable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with you

national legislation.

For business users in the European Union, if you wish to discard

electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or

supplier for further information.

USAGE RESTRICTIONS FOR PRODUCTS THAT INCORPORATE

REDLINK

Products that fall into this category are denoted

by inclusion of the Class 2 identifier symbol (ex-

clamation mark in a circle) accompanying the CE

Mark on the products regulatory label, example

to the left.

FRANCE

Usage Restrictions - Geographic Area Where Restriction Applies :

France

For mainland France

 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Channels 1-16) authorized for indoor use

 2.400 - 2.454 GHz (Channels 1-10) authorized for outdoor use

Restrictions d’utilisation - Zone géographique où les restrictions

s’appliquent : France

Pour la France métropolitaine

 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 à 16) autorisé en usage intérieur

 2.400 - 2.454 GHz (canaux 1 à 10) autorisé en usage extérieur

NORWAY

This subsection does not apply for the geographical area within a

radius of 20 km from the centre of Ny-Ålesund

Dette gjelder ikke for det geografiske området innenfor en radius av

20 km fra sentrum av Ny-Ålesund

RESPONSIBLE PARTY

RED Digital Cinema

34 Parker

Irvine, CA 92618

USA

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 6

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

 DO NOT use the camera or accessories near water. Avoid ex-

posing your camera to moisture. The unit is not waterproof,

so contact with water could cause permanent damage to the

unit as well as electric shock and serious injury to the user. DO

NOT use the camera in the rain or under other conditions with

high moisture without appropriate protection, and immediately

remove power source if camera or accessories are exposed to

moisture.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or elec-

tric shock, do not expose the camera to

rain or moisture.

 DO NOT expose the DSMC to laser beams, as laser beams may

damage the sensor.

 DO NOT expose your camera to excessive vibration or impact

(shock). Be careful not to drop your camera. Internal mecha-

nisms may be damaged by severe shock. Mechanical alignment

of optical elements may be affected by excessive vibration.

 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE: The use of devices us-

ing radio or other communication waves may result in the mal-

function or interference with the unit and/or with audio and

video signals.

 Clean only using a dry cloth. When cleaning your camera, re-

member that it is not waterproof and moisture can damage

electronic circuitry. DO NOT rinse or immerse any element

of the camera, lens or other accessory, keep them dry at all

times. DO NOT use soaps, detergents, ammonia, alkaline

cleaners, and abrasive cleaning compounds or solvents. These

substances may damage lens coatings and electronic circuitry.

 Maintain sufficient ventilation—DO NOT block any ventilation

openings or obstruct cooling fan airflow.

CAUTION: Proper camera ventilation re-

quires a minimum 0.5" (1.25 cm) clearance

between the camera ventilation openings

and external surfaces. Verify that objects

that can block the fan intake and ex-

haust ports do not impede airflow. Failure

to permit adequate airflow may result in

overheating of the camera, degraded op-

eration and in extreme situations, damage

to the camera.

 DO NOT operate or store near any heat sources such as radia-

tors, heat registers, stoves, or any other apparatus that pro-

duce heat. Store in a protected, level and ventilated place.

Avoid exposure to temperature extremes, damp, severe vibra-

tion, strong magnetic fields, direct sunlight or local heat sourc-

es during storage. Remove any batteries from the camera be-

fore storage. Recommended storage and usage temperatures

for your camera, lenses and other accessories are:

‒ Operating range: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

‒ Storage range: –20°C to 50°C (–4°F to 122°F)

If there are any performance issues with your camera or acces-

sories when operating within this temperature range, please

file a support ticket on https://support.red.com.

 The DSMC Side Handle, side SSD modules, rear modules, and

lens mounts are NOT HOT SWAPPABLE, meaning you cannot

remove or install them while the camera is turned on. Before

installing or removing any of these accessories, you MUST turn

off the camera. Failure to do so may result in damage to the

accessory and/or camera BRAIN that will not be covered under

warranty.

 DO NOT bypass the third prong of the grounding-type plug on

the power cord of the AC Power Adapter. A grounding-type

plug has two blades and a third “grounding” prong. The third

prong is provided for your safety. A grounding-type plug shall

be connected to an outlet with a protective earthen connec-

tion. If the grounding-type plug does not fit into your outlet,

do not attempt to modify the plug or outlet, consult a qualified

electrician.

 Protect all power cords from being pinched, walked on or

driven over by a vehicle. Replace any power cords suspected

of sustaining damage due to crushing or other forms physical

damage.

Products marked with this symbol are

class 2 devices. These devices are not

provided with a grounding type plug.

CAUTION: The power cord plug for the AC

Power Adapter is used as the power dis-

connect. To disconnect all power from the

AC Power Adapter, unplug the power cord

plug from the wall outlet. During use, the

power cord plug should remain easily ac-

cessible at all times.

 Lithium-ion batteries may be subject to special handling re-

quirements pursuant to federal and local laws. Please refer to

specific shipping instructions included with your battery re-

garding proper transport of your battery. Do not handle your

battery if it is damaged or leaking. Disposal of batteries must

be in accordance with local environmental regulations. For

example, California law requires that all rechargeable batter-

ies must be recycled by an authorized recycle center. Storing

batteries fully charged or in high temperature conditions may

permanently reduce the life of the battery. Available battery

capacity may also be temporarily lessened after storage in low

temperature conditions.

WARNING: DO NOT expose the battery to

excessive heat.

WARNING: Danger of explosion if an incor-

rect battery is charged with the RED Char-

ger or is used to power the camera and

accessories. Replace only with the same

or equivalent type battery.

CAUTION: Refer all service and repair to

qualified RED service personnel. To reduce

the risk of electric shock, and damage to

the camera or accessories, DO NOT at-

tempt to perform any servicing other than

any procedures that are recommended in

the operating instructions.

INDOOR USE ONLY: Products marked with

this symbol are designed for use indoors

only.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

BATTERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

WARNING: Failure to read, understand, and fol-

low these instructions may result in overheat-

ing, chemical leakage, smoke emission, fire, or

other potentially harmful results.

Always follow proper battery handling and storage practices. Im-

proper handling and/or failure to abide by proper storage instruc-

tions may cause permanent damage to batteries, or degrade battery

charge holding capacity. Improper handling practices or failure to

comply with instructions may also put you at risk.

Lithium-Ion batteries, like the REDVOLT

, REDVOLT XL, and RED

BRICK

, self-discharge over time. When storing for long periods

of time, store batteries separately from the camera or charger and

remember to charge batteries to a capacity level of 50% to 80%. If

batteries will be stored for long periods of time, RED recommends

that you check the charge level at least once every six (6) months,

and recharge batteries to a capacity level of 50% to 80%.

When not in use, remove the battery from the camera or charger and

store the battery in a cool, dry place. Avoid extreme hot tempera-

tures (such as inside a hot car), corrosive gas, and direct sunlight.

The optimal storage temperature for batteries is between –20°C to

20°C (–4°F to 68°F).

WARNING: Batteries stored in a discharged state

for long periods of time may self-discharge and

lose the ability to hold a charge.

WARNING: If recharging operation fails to com-

plete even when a specified recharging time

has elapsed, immediately stop further recharg-

ing.

 DO NOT store batteries in a fully charged state for extended

DO NOT store batteries in a fully charged state for extended

periods of time.

 DO NOT store batteries in a fully discharged state for extended

periods of time.

 DO NOT store batteries in the camera, in a camera module, or

in a charger for extended periods of time.

 DO NOT use batteries for purposes other than their intended

use.

 DO NOT store batteries in extreme hot or cold temperatures.

 DO NOT store batteries in direct sunlight.

 DO NOT use third-party chargers with your RED batteries.

 DO NOT disassemble or modify the battery.

 DO NOT overcharge batteries. Overcharging may increase in-

ternal temperature beyond the recommended limits and cause

permanent damage to the battery.

 DO NOT connect the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals to

a metal object such as a wire.

 DO NOT transport or store the battery together with metal ob-

jects such as jewelry, hairpins, etc. as they may generate heat

if they come into contact with the battery.

 DO NOT discard the battery into fire or heat.

 DO NOT store, use, or recharge the battery near a heat source

such as a fire or a heater.

 DO NOT allow the battery to get wet.

 DO NOT pierce the battery with pointed or other sharp objects.

 DO NOT step on, throw, or strike the battery with a hammer.

 DO NOT use a battery that appears to be deformed or dam-

aged.

 DO NOT directly solder the battery.

 DO NOT put the battery into a microwave oven or a pressur-

ized container.

 DO NOT use or subject the battery to intense sunlight or hot

temperatures such as in a car in hot weather.

 DO NOT use it in a location where static electricity may be

present.

 DO NOT exceed the recharging temperature range of 0˚C to

40˚C (32˚F to 104˚F).

 RED recommends that you only use RED chargers to recharge

RED batteries.

 Store the battery in a location where children cannot reach it.

 If the battery leaks or gives off a bad odor, discontinue use

immediately.

 If the battery gives off an odor, generates heat, becomes dis-

colored or deformed, or in any way appears abnormal dur-

ing use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it from the

equipment or battery charger and discontinue use.

 If electrolyte begins leaking from the battery and comes into

contact with your skin or clothing, immediately wash it away

with running water. Failure to do this may result in skin inflam-

mation.

 If the battery leaks and the electrolyte reaches the eyes, do

not rub them. Instead, rinse the eyes with clean running water

and immediately seek medical attention. Failure to do this may

result in eye injury.

 If you find discoloration, a bad odor due to leakage, overheat-

ing and/or other irregularities when using the battery for the

first time, contact your Bomb Squad representative immedi-

ately.

NOTE: For more information regarding RED bat-

tery charging and instructions for care, please

refer to our Terms and Conditions.

SHIPPING DISCLAIMER

Shipment of Lithium Ion cells and batteries is subject to national

and international shipping requirements. A Class 9 Certified shipper

is required to transport these products within the United States.

REDVOLT, REDVOLT XL, and RED BRICK batteries are considered

Dangerous Goods. Other products such as REDVOLT AA and RED

Li 7.2V batteries may also be classified as Dangerous Goods when

purchased in bulk. Applicable laws prohibit the shipping of batteries

that are physically damaged. We urge you to look into the formal

rules and regulations of shipping Class 9 Dangerous Goods prior to

preparing your shipment. For more information on these regulations,

please visit www.iata.org and www.dot.gov.

For more information, see our FAQs for Regulated Items (Dangerous

Goods.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 8

The EPIC and SCARLET cameras are part of the RED

Digital Still and Motion Camera (DSMC

) system. The

DSMC family includes WEAPON, EPIC, and SCARLET

cameras. With an ultra-high megapixel count, high

frame rate, significant processing power, high dynamic range, and the advantages of a raw file format, each

DSMC offers the ability to simultaneously capture video and stills.

This guide is for EPIC and SCARLET only. This section introduces the imaging capabilities and advanced

features of the EPIC and SCARLET system. For information about WEAPON cameras, see the DSMC Operation

Guide: WEAPON, available at www.red.com/downloads.

The EPIC and SCARLET system includes the following cameras (organized by sensor type):

SENSOR TYPE CAMERA

RED DRAGON

EPIC-M RED DRAGON (CARBON FIBER)

EPIC-M RED DRAGON

EPIC-X RED DRAGON

SCARLET DRAGON

MYSTERIUM-X

EPIC-M MYSTERIUM-X

EPIC-X MYSTERIUM-X

SCARLET-X

MYSTERIUM-X

MONOCHROME EPIC-M MONOCHROME

EPIC-X MONOCHROME

RED DRAGON MONOCHROME EPIC-M RED DRAGON MONOCHROME

READ BEFORE YOU SHOOT

Read this operation guide carefully and in its entirety before assembling or operating your DSMC or other RED

accessories. In addition to this document, RED offers the following operation guides for the DSMC system:

 DSMC Power Operation Guide

 DSMC Media Operation Guide

To download RED operation guides, visit the RED downloads page at www.red.com/downloads.

EPIC Digital Still

and Motion Cameras

(DSMC)

EPIC/SCARLET

INTRODUCTION

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DSMC BRAIN

At the center of the RED modular system is the DSMC BRAIN

, housing the critical image capture electronics

and digital image sensor.

The expansive RED arsenal of DSMC modules, monitors, lens mounts, controllers, power, media, and other

accessories supports both the EPIC and SCARLET BRAINs. Modular DSMC lens mounts enable you to use your

existing Canon

, Nikon

, Leica-M

, and PL lenses to capture the perfect shot.

EPIC-M AND EPIC-X

EPIC-M and EPIC-X BRAINs are the pinnacle of professional cinema-grade cameras, capable of capturing video

and stills at up to 6K resolution at 100 frames per second (FPS). Designed with an entirely modular architecture,

advanced image processing capabilities, and integrated audio system, the EPIC delivers a remarkable amount

of technology—packed into a five (5) lb body.

EPIC-M RED DRAGON (CARBON FIBER)

The EPIC-M RED DRAGON (CARBON FIBER) is engineered with carbon fiber and magnesium parts to significantly

reduce weight. Due to the material characteristics of carbon fiber and magnesium, hardware and mounting

points differ from the standard aluminum BRAIN and weight restrictions may apply. Some DSMC components

are not compatible with the EPIC-M RED DRAGON (CARBON FIBER).

NOTE: Use ONLY designated side SSD modules, magnesium lens mounts, and hardware with the EPIC-M RED

DRAGON (CARBON FIBER).

SCARLET-X

The SCARLET-X BRAIN leaves one-dimensional DSLRs in its wake, letting you capture up to 6K video and stills

with the RED DRAGON sensor, or 5K video and stills with the MYSTERIUM-X sensor. The SCARLET-X offers the

same raw potential as the EPIC with the .R3D

file format that offers unmatched dynamic range, image latitude,

and evolving color science.

EPIC-M BRAIN

(Left) and

SCARLET-X BRAIN

(Right)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 10

RED DIGITAL SENSORS

Each EPIC or SCARLET BRAIN is equipped with one of the following sensors:

 RED DRAGON (6K)

 MYSTERIUM-X (5K)

 MONOCHROME (5K)

 RED DRAGON MONOCHROME (6K)

RED DRAGON SENSOR (6K)

The RED DRAGON (6K) sensor captures over nine (9) times more resolution than standard HD. The result is

unrivaled detail and impressive native exposure that exceeds 35mm film in both latitude and image density.

The RED DRAGON (6K) sensor is a model for image innovation, leading the way in the evolution of digital cinema

technology. Boasting an industry-leading 19 megapixels at 6K resolution, the RED DRAGON (6K) supports

100+ frames per second (FPS), 16.5+ stops of dynamic range, and advanced color science.

MYSTERIUM-X SENSOR

The MYSTERIUM-X sensor was designed specifically for the RED DSMC to capture an industry-leading 5K

resolution digital image. The EPIC MYSTERIUM-X provides variable frame rate imaging at up to 95 FPS at 5K

FF resolution, and up to 400 FPS at 1K WS resolution.

RED DRAGON

6K Resolution

MYSTERIUM-X

5K Resolution

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

The MYSTERIUM-X sensor includes high-precision analog to digital conversion, capable of delivering up to 13.5

stops of dynamic range with daytime light sources 800 ISO. With HDRx

, dynamic range can be extended up

to approximately 18 stops.

MONOCHROME AND RED DRAGON MONOCHROME SENSORS

The MONOCHROME (5K) and RED DRAGON MONOCHROME (6K) are the black and white (B&W) equivalent

of the MYSTERIUM-X and RED DRAGON sensors, respectively. Both MONOCHROME sensors use their unique

sensor pattern to achieve optimum resolution and extended dynamic range. The MONOCHROME sensors also

take advantage of greater light sensitivity and tonal transfer in gradients, far exceeding the monochrome quality

of a color image converted to black and white.

NOTE: The MONOCHROME and RED DRAGON MONOCHROME sensors are only available with EPIC BRAINs.

R3D FILE FORMAT AND REDCODE

The R3D file format was developed by RED to provide an efficient and manageable RAW video data format that

promotes advanced post-production editing capabilities. In the R3D file format, the digital image received from

the sensor is formatted as a pixel-defect corrected (but in all other aspects unprocessed) 16-bit per pixel RAW

data frame. Each RAW frame, or sequence of RAW frames in a clip, is compressed using a proprietary wavelet

based REDCODE

RAW compression, then stored to a RED MINI-MAG

or REDMAG™ 1.8" SSD.

RAW data is recorded independently of any RGB domain color processing such as ISO, White Balance, or

other RGB color space settings. Instead, color parameters are saved as reference metadata; that is, color is

not burned into the recorded RAW data. This recording technique promotes flexibility in RGB color processing,

which can be deferred to post-production or adjusted in the field, without affecting the recorded RAW data

image quality or dynamic range.

REDCODE is a visually lossless, wavelet-based compression codec that reduces R3D RAW files into a

manageable size, allowing longer recording times on media. The ability to compress RAW data is one of the

significant technologies that RED has brought to the industry.

For more information, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

NOTE: REDCINE-X PRO

can create and export .RMD “Look” files which may then be imported as camera

monitor path color processing presets. This information is stored as reference metadata, so that these color

processing choices can be the default values used in post-production. For more information, go to “Looks” on

page 139.

MONOCHROME

Sensor Still

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 12

SHOOT FOR VIDEO AND STILLS

High resolution video, such as the digital footage captured by the DSMC, has surpassed the detail necessary

to produce professional full-sized prints. Because of the ability to record at high frame rates and resolution, the

DSMC is ideally suited to capture video and still images, simultaneously.

The DSMC is equipped with a Stills mode that makes it easier to capture stunning images. With presets

optimized for stills and Swipe-Up Shortcuts for the RED Touch display, switching from Motion mode to Stills

mode is seamless. Using REDCINE-X PRO, or other editing applications supporting the RED SDK, you can pull

full resolution still images from R3D files.

NOTE: Stills mode is compatible with v6.0 firmware or later.

POST PRODUCTION WITH REDCINE-X PRO

REDCINE-X PRO is a professional coloring toolset, equipped with an integrated timeline and a post effects

software collection that provides the ideal environment to edit, organize, and prepare your R3D files.

RED TETHER, included in REDCINE-X PRO, allows you to record footage from your camera directly to a

computer or an external drive. Using tethering bypasses the need to record to an SSD and offload to a

computer later, saving you time.

NOTE: RED TETHER is included in REDCINE-X PRO build 35 or later.

Download the latest version of REDCINE-X PRO on the RED Downloads page at www.red.com/downloads.

REDCINE-X PRO

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

HDRX AND MAGIC MOTION

HDRX

HDRx extends dynamic range up to six (6) stops by simultaneously capturing two (2) images of identical resolution

and frame rate. The first image is a normally exposed track (A-track), while the second is an underexposed

track (X-track) with an exposure value that reflects the additional stops of highlight protection. These tracks are

“motion-conjoined” during recording, leaving no time gap between the two (2) exposures. This is different from

traditional alternating exposures, which have small gaps between tracks, producing unwanted motion tracks.

MAGIC MOTION

MAGIC MOTION is a post production method that combines two (2) HDRx tracks to create an image with both

natural motion blur (from the A-track) and sharper reference (the X-track). MAGIC MOTION produces an image

with an extraordinary dynamic range that is not available with any other motion capture camera.

Shooting at 24 FPS with a 180° (1/48 sec) shutter on traditional film or digital cameras produces motion blur

throughout, which is not the way the human eye observes motion. For example, ask someone to swing their

arm. What you would observe in a traditional recording of this action is constant motion blur until the arm stops.

However, what your eye sees is both motion blur and a sharper reference of the arm throughout the motion

path. MAGIC MOTION creates an image that matches the natural motion observed by the human eye.

ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

The following resources offer additional information about RED, the DSMC system, and the RED community:

 RED.com: Check the official RED website for the latest information about RED products.

 RED Learn Articles: RED offers in-depth technical articles about RED cameras, post-production, and digital

cinematography.

 RED.com/downloads: Go to the RED Downloads page to download the latest firmware, operation guides,

and post-production software.

 DSMC Toolkit: Go to the RED Downloads page to find the DSMC Toolkit, which offers many helpful tools and

resources to customize and improve your DSMC workflow.

 Support.red.com: Check the RED SUPPORT site for FAQs, or to file a support ticket.

 Bomb Squad Support: For more information, contact your Bomb Squad representative.

 In-Camera Help: Select the Help button on an in-camera screen to open up the help for that screen.

 Reduser.net: Discuss all things RED on the REDUSER third-party forum.

HDRx

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 14

This section provides an overview of the EPIC/SCARLET system components, including:

 “BRAIN” on page 15

 “DSMC Media Modules” on page 16

 “REDMAG and RED MINI-MAG Systems” on page 18

 “EPIC/SCARLET Adaptor Modules” on page 19

 “RED Batteries and Chargers” on page 22

 “Other DSMC Modules” on page 22

 “Displays and Electronic Viewfinders” on page 25

 “LEMO Adaptors” on page 29

 “Camera Control Modules” on page 30

 “Lens Mounts” on page 33

 “Interchangeable OLPFs” on page 34

 “Rails, Mounts, Tactical Gear, and Cables” on page 34

WARNING: Modules, displays, and accessories are NOT HOT SWAPPABLE, meaning that you cannot remove or

install the item while the camera is turned on. Before installing or removing a module, display, or accessory,

you MUST turn off the camera. Failure to do so may result in damage to the item or DSMC that is not covered

under warranty.

NOTE: Availability of components listed in this chapter is subject to change at any time.

ADDITIONAL RESOURCES

For more information on power and media, see the following guides, available at www.red.com/downloads:

 DSMC Power Operation Guide

 DSMC Media Operation Guide

EPIC-M RED

DRAGON Kit

EPIC/SCARLET SYSTEM

COMPONENTS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

BRAIN

The DSMC

BRAIN

is the image processing center of the DSMC system and supports power, media, and other

modules.

BRAIN CONTROL: PWR/REC BUTTON

 Fully press and hold the PWR/REC button for two (2) seconds to turn on/off.

 When the DSMC is on, fully press and then release the PWR/REC button to toggle record start/stop.

BRAIN LEDS

This section describes the LED functions for the EPIC/SCARLET BRAIN.

LED COLOR/FLASHING DESCRIPTION

Power Status LED

(PWR)

Off No power present

Green Power present; camera on

Amber flashing Power present; 5–10 min of battery time left

Amber Power present; camera booting

Red flashing Power present; < 5 min of battery time left

Red Power present; camera off

Record Status LED

(REC)

Off No media present

Green Ready to record

Amber Finalizing

Red flashing (slow) Recording; 25% media left

Red flashing (fast) Recording; 5% media left

Red Recording

EPIC BRAIN (Side)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 16

LED COLOR/FLASHING DESCRIPTION

Power Status LED (PWR)

and Record Status LED (REC)

Both green flashing Firmware update in progress

Both red flashing Firmware update error

DSMC MEDIA MODULES

This section describes the DSMC media modules. RED offers the following DSMC media modules:

ITEM PART NUMBER

DSMC 1.8" SSD Side Module 720-0013

DSMC 1.8" SSD Side Module (DRAGON)

N/A

Carbon Fiber DSMC 1.8" SSD Side Module (DRAGON)

N/A

RED MINI-MAG

Side SSD Module 720-0021

Carbon Fiber RED MINI-MAG Side SSD Module

N/A

Rear SSD Module 720-0009

1. The DSMC 1.8" SSD Side Module (DRAGON) is only available with the purchase of a RED DRAGON sensor-based BRAIN.

2. Carbon fiber side SSD modules are only available with the purchase of a carbon fiber BRAIN.

DSMC SIDE SSD MODULES

DSMC media modules attach to the DSMC to enable the use of RED MINI-MAG or REDMAG™ 1.8" SSD media.

Both DSMC side SSD module systems have the same EVF/LCD LEMO

connector, user keys, and REC button.

DSMC SIDE SSD MODULE CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR TYPE CONNECTOR FUNCTION

EVF/LCD N/A Power and external monitoring support for an electronic

viewfinder or display

WARNING: The DSMC side SSD modules are NOT HOT SWAPPABLE, meaning you cannot remove or install

modules while the camera is turned on. Before installing or removing modules you MUST turn off the camera.

Failure to do so may result in damage to the module or DSMC that will not be covered under warranty.

For more information, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

RED MINI-MAG Side SSD

Module

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DSMC SIDE SSD MODULE CONTROLS

# CONTROL DESCRIPTION

1 User Key 1 Programmable key

User Key 1 + 2 Press: Eject Media

2 REC button Programmable key

Full Press: Record Toggle

Half Press: AF Start

3 User Key 2 Programmable key

User Key 1 + 2 Press: Eject Media

REAR SSD MODULE

The Rear SSD Module secures to the back of a Module Adaptor or a +1 Adaptor Module to serve as a rear

location for recording to a REDMAG 1.8" SSD.

For more information, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

Rear SSD Module

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 18

REDMAG AND RED MINI-MAG SYSTEMS

REDMAG 1.8” SSDs and RED MINI-MAG

SSDs deliver fast and reliable recording options for your camera. A

RED STATION

enables you to connect media to your computer for offloading and editing.

RED offers the following RED MINI-MAG SSDs and compatible RED STATIONs:

ITEM PART NUMBER

RED MINI-MAG (1TB)

1,2

750-0068

RED MINI-MAG (512GB)

750-0053

RED MINI-MAG (240GB)

750-0072

RED MINI-MAG (120GB) 750-0075

RED STATION RED MINI-MAG 750-0055

1. The RED MINI-MAG 1TB can take up to 20 seconds to mount to a computer or a DSMC.

2. The RED MINI-MAG 1TB requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.3.34 or later.

3. The RED MINI-MAG 512GB requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.1.34 or later.

4. The RED MINI-MAG 240GB requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.1.47 or later.

RED offers the following REDMAG 1.8" SSDs and compatible RED STATIONS:

ITEM PART NUMBER

REDMAG 1.8" SSD (48GB) 750-0044

REDMAG 1.8" SSD (64GB) 750-0025

REDMAG 1.8" SSD (128GB)

750-0021

REDMAG 1.8" SSD (240GB)

750-0061

REDMAG 1.8" SSD (256GB)

750-0026

REDMAG 1.8" SSD (512GB)

750-0037

RED STATION REDMAG 1.8" 750-0006

RED STATION REDMAG 1.8" (MINI)–ESATA 750-0035

RED STATION REDMAG 1.8" (MINI)–USB 3.0 750-0036

RED STATION REDMAG 2.5" 750-0007

1. These REDMAG 1.8" SSDs are no longer available for purchase at red.com, but are still supported by RED.

2. The REDMAG 1.8" SSD (240GB) requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.1.44 or later.

For more information, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

RED MINI-MAG (1TB)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

EPIC/SCARLET ADAPTOR MODULES

This section describes the EPIC/SCARLET adaptor modules.

EPIC/SCARLET adaptor modules enable you to connect other DSMC modules to the EPIC/SCARLET BRAIN

for expandable functionality. The +1 Adaptor Module provides an auxiliary power port for accessories and an

additional EVF/LCD port for additional monitor viewing and output.

Both adaptor modules also offer additional 1/4-20 mounting points on top for configuration support. Most

DSMC modules require a Module Adaptor or +1 Adaptor Module to attach to your EPIC/SCARLET BRAIN.

For more information, go to “Configure Your DSMC” on page 36.

WARNING: The Module Adaptor is NOT compatible with the +1 Adaptor Module.

WARNING: The +1 Adaptor Module IS NOT compatible with the Module Adaptor.

WARNING: DO NOT use the EVF/LCD port if a Pro I/O Module is connected to the EPIC/SCARLET BRAIN.

RED offers the following EPIC/SCARLET adaptor modules:

ITEM PART NUMBER

Module Adaptor 720-0008

+1 Adaptor Module

720-0018

1. The +1 Adaptor Module requires that your DSMC is on firmware v4.08 or later.

Module Adaptor (left) and

+1 Adaptor Module (right)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 20

+1 ADAPTOR MODULE CONNECTIONS

# CONNECTOR CONNECTOR TYPE CONNECTOR FUNCTION

1 Mounting 1/4-20 mounting Supports bolt-on auxiliary equipment

2 EVF/LCD

N/A Custom digital video and power interconnection between

BRAIN and RED EVF or RED LCD; Pinout not published

3 Auxiliary power

out (PWR)

4-pin 0B LEMO Supplies unregulated (+) 11.5 to 17 V battery pass-through;

Connect to 2-pin LEMO accessories with the RED 4-Pin to

2-Pin Adaptor Cable; Max sustained current is 2 A

4 REDMOTE

dock

connector

8-point POGO

connector

Power and support for the REDMOTE

5 Dock connector SEARAY connector Supports power and communication with modules

1. WARNING: DO NOT use the EVF/LCD connector if a Pro I/O Module is connected to the BRAIN.

NOTE: The default auxiliary power output setting is on. To toggle the power setting on/off, go to Menu > Power >

Power Out > +1 PWR. The last power output setting is saved until a firmware upgrade or a factory reset.

+1 ADAPTOR MODULE ACCESSORIES

For more information, as well as a full list of EVF/LCD cables and other accessory cables, visit www.red.com.

ACCESSORY CONNECTOR TYPE CONNECTOR FUNCTION PART NUMBER

4-Pin To 2-Pin

Adaptor Cable

4-pin 0B to 2-pin 0B

LEMO

Power support for 2-pin based accessories 790-0334

Micro HDMI-to-

HDMI Adaptor

Micro HDMI to

Standard HDMI

HDMI video connection from BRAIN to support

auxiliary EVF/LCD attachment

N/A

1. The 4-Pin to 2-Pin Adaptor Cable converts 4-pin power into a 2-pin female LEMO connection, enabling support for 2-pin based acces-

sories from the +1 Adaptor Module or Pro I/O Module.

2. The Micro HDMI-to-HDMI Adaptor is field-replaceable.

+1 Adaptor Module

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

POWER MODULES

This section describes the power modules for the camera.

DSMC power modules attach to a Module Adaptor or +1 Adaptor Module to provide the DSMC with flexible

power options for REDVOLT

, REDVOLT XL, and RED BRICK

batteries. When used in combination with a

DSMC AC Power Adaptor or DSMC Side Handle, you can hot-swap batteries without interrupting recording.

RED offers the following DSMC power modules:

ITEM PART NUMBER

Pro Battery Module (Dual) 720-0005

Pro Battery Module (Quad) 720-0006

REDVOLT XL Module

740-0031

Quickplate Module 790-0343

Backpack Quickplate (Short) 790-0342

RED Quickplate 790-0008

1. The REDVOLT XL Module requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.1.29 or later.

For more information, see the DSMC Power Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

Pro Battery Module (Quad)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 22

RED BATTERIES AND CHARGERS

This section describes the RED lithium-ion batteries and charger solutions.

The REDVOLT, REDVOLT XL, and RED BRICK are lightweight, rechargeable lithium-ion battery cells that provide

sustained power to the BRAIN. These batteries provide long-term mobile power and attach to the BRAIN via

a DSMC power module or other RED accessory, such as the DSMC Side Handle. RED chargers replenish lost

capacity for REDVOLT, REDVOLT XL, and RED BRICK batteries.

RED offers the following batteries and chargers:

ITEM PART NUMBER

REDVOLT 740-0020

REDVOLT XL 740-0021

RED BRICK 740-0002

REDVOLT Travel Charger 790-0134

REDVOLT Charger (Quad) 740-0015

RED CHARGER 740-0006

For more information, see the DSMC Power Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

OTHER DSMC MODULES

This section describes other DSMC modules. RED offers the following miscellaneous DSMC modules:

ITEM PART NUMBER

Pro I/O Module 720-0004

REDCAST Module

720-0025

1. The REDCAST Module requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.2.28 or later.

REDVOLT XL (left) and REDVOLT

(right)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

PRO I/O MODULE

The Pro I/O Module brings together the essential input and output (I/O) connections in one (1) module, providing

a central hub for professional audio and video components. The Pro I/O Module offers the following features:

 Centralized ports that make it easy to manage connections and cables.

 LCD/EVF port that allows you to connect an additional RED LCD or EVF.

 Customizable triggers that interface with third-party GPIO and RS232 control devices using Pro I/O cables.

 Mounting points for an additional DSMC module or a REDMOTE.

 Internal cooling system that maintains an appropriate operating temperature.

For more information, see the Pro I/O Module Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

Pro I/O Module

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 24

REDCAST MODULE

The REDCAST™ Module allows for live 4K streaming, enabling you to capture and view action in real-time.

Compatible with both EPIC DRAGON and SCARLET DRAGON cameras, the REDCAST Module uses four (4)

3G-SDI output connections to broadcast 4K video at up to 60 frames per second. Five (5) 1/4-20 mounting

holes are built into the top of the module, allowing for various mechanical peripherals to be attached.

For more information, see the REDCAST Module Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

REDCAST Module

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DISPLAYS AND ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDERS

RED offers the following displays and electronic viewfinders (EVFs):

ITEM RESOLUTION PART NUMBER

WEAPON RED Touch 7.0" LCD

1920 x 1136 730-0018

WEAPON RED Touch 4.7" LCD

1280 x 720 730-0019

RED Touch 5.0" LCD

800 x 400 730-0008

RED Touch 7.0" LCD

2, 3

1920 x 1136 730-0007

RED Touch 9.0" LCD

1280 x 768 730-0011

RED PRO LCD 7"

1024 x 600 730-0009

WEAPON RED EVF (OLED)

1920 x 1080 730-0021

BOMB EVF

(LCOS)

1280 x 784 730-0004

BOMB EVF (OLED)

1280 x 1024 730-0010

1. Using this display with an EPIC or SCARLET camera requires a WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B.

2. Using these displays with a WEAPON camera requires a WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A.

3. RED offers multiple mounting solutions for each camera type.

3. The RED Touch 7.0” LCD requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.2.38 or later.

For a full list of LCD and EVF user keys and default actions, go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 26

RED LCDS

RED displays provide important camera parameters on the graphical user interface (GUI) and offer a variety of

monitor viewing options. RED touchscreen displays enable you to use gestures to navigate menus and adjust

camera parameters. RED displays feature 8-bit RGB, 4:4:4 progressive scan, providing up to 16.7 million colors

and up to 70% NTSC color gamut.

LCD PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: DO NOT use a RED display as a handle to lift or carry the DSMC. Damage to a RED display or other

components of the DSMC system caused by using the display as a handle are not covered under warranty.

WARNING: DO NOT use the threaded holes in the RED Touch LCD base to mount the display to the BRAIN.

Damage to a RED display or other components of the DSMC system caused by using these threaded holes is

not covered under warranty.

IMPORTANT: The RED Touch LCD swivel axis has a total adjustment range of approximately 360˚ (180˚ clockwise

or counterclockwise from the nominal “rear-facing” orientation). The tilt axis range of adjustment is approximately

180˚. Damage to a RED display or other DSMC components caused by excessive force is not covered under

warranty.

IMPORTANT: The WEAPON RED Touch 4.7" LCD has a tilt axis range of approximately 240˚ (90˚ forward and 150˚

backward). Damage to a RED display or other DSMC components caused by excessive force is not covered

under warranty.

RED Touch 7.0" LCD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

BOMB EVFS

The BOMB EVF (LCOS) and BOMB EVF (OLED) deliver specialized viewing solutions for the DSMC. The BOMB

EVF (LCOS) is a high-definition, lightweight, and low-profile viewfinder. The BOMB EVF (OLED) uses OLED

technology, providing deeper blacks and more color accurate images.

ITEM CONTRAST RATIO DIOPTER RANGE

BOMB EVF (LCOS)

1000:1 typical 2.0 to –5.0.1

BOMB EVF (OLED)

>10,000:1 typical 2.0 to –5.0.1

1. Using these displays with a WEAPON camera requires a WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A.

WARNING: DO NOT point the BOMB EVF (OLED) eyepiece at direct sunlight. Continued exposure to direct

sunlight may damage the EVF. Point the eyepiece away from sunlight when not in use. Damage to the BOMB

EVF (OLED) caused by continued exposure to direct sunlight is not covered under warranty.

BOMB EVF FEATURES

# FEATURE DESCRIPTION

1 EVF connector Custom digital video and power interconnection between the BRAIN and RED

EVF; Pinout not published

2 EVF Tally LED When enabled, the LED illuminates red when recording; For more information,

go to “Indicator” on page 104

3 Key 1 Programmable key

Magnify: Toggle

4 Key 2 Programmable key

Exposure Check: Toggle

5 Eyepiece heater The integrated eyepiece heater automatically heats the eyepiece when the

EVF detects a low ambient temperature

BOMB EVF (OLED)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 28

WEAPON RED EVF

The WEAPON RED EVF (OLED) is a high definition electronic viewfinder designed as the ideal single-viewer

monitoring solution. Featuring the latest OLED technology, this EVF provides an unmatched personal viewing

experience with a 1080p OLED micro-display, and improved color accuracy with 30-bit RGB color represenation.

View and monitor your RED footage as it is intended with truer colors and deeper blacks in a larger field of view.

Engineered with OBSOLESCENCE OBSOLETE

in mind, the WEAPON RED EVF (OLED) is perfect for use with

WEAPON, EPIC, or SCARLET cameras. RED offers multiple mounting solutions for each camera type.

WARNING: DO NOT point the WEAPON RED EVF (OLED) eyepiece at direct sunlight. Continued exposure to

direct sunlight may damage the EVF. Point the eyepiece away from sunlight when not in use. Damage to the

WEAPON RED EVF (OLED) caused by continued exposure to direct sunlight is not covered under warranty.

WEAPON RED EVF FEATURES

# FEATURE DESCRIPTION

1 WEAPON RED EVF Mount The WEAPON RED EVF Mount

2 EVF connector

Custom digital video and power interconnection between the EVF and

other RED devices; Pinout not published

3 Key 1 Programmable key

Magnify: Toggle

4 Key 2 Programmable key

Exposure Check: Toggle

5 Mounting point Mounting point for the WEAPON RED EVF Mounting Plate (Top)

6 WEAPON RED EVF

Modular Optical Block

Fully coated with a > 32° field of view

1. Not visible. Shown with the WEAPON RED EVF Mount attached.

WEAPON RED EVF

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

LEMO ADAPTORS

This section describes the WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A and the WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B. These adaptors

enable you to use EPIC/SCARLET displays with your WEAPON camera and use WEAPON displays with your

EPIC/SCARLET camera. For more information on available displays, go to “Displays and Electronic Viewfinders”

on page 25.

ITEM PART NUMBER

WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A 720-0037

WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B 720-0038

LEMO ADAPTOR A

The WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A makes your existing RED Touch and RED PRO displays, as well as RED EVFs,

fully compatible with the WEAPON camera system. The WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A converts the pogo connection

on the WEAPON BRAIN to a legacy EVF/LCD LEMO port. The WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A is designed to attach

to the primary (top), or the secondary (side) EVF/LCD port on the WEAPON BRAIN.

When used along with the WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B, this adaptor enables you to mount a WEAPON RED 7.0"

LCD away from the camera BRAIN—to a NOGA arm or other stable mounting point.

The WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A is compatible with the BOMB EVF, (LCOS) and (OLED) models, or later.

LEMO ADAPTOR B

The WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B enables you to use the WEAPON RED 7.0" LCD with your existing EPIC or

SCARLET camera BRAIN. The WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B converts the display signal from a pogo connection to

a legacy EVF/LCD LEMO port. The WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B is designed to mount to your EPIC or SCARLET

camera BRAIN using standard 1/4-20 mounting holes.

When used along with the WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A, this adaptor enables you to mount a WEAPON RED 7.0"

LCD away from the camera BRAIN—to a NOGA arm or other stable mounting point.

WEAPON LEMO Adaptor A

WEAPON LEMO Adaptor B

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 30

CAMERA CONTROL MODULES

This section describes the camera control modules. These devices provide a wide array of programmable

buttons, controls, and other features to interact with the camera.

RED offers the following remotes and controls:

ITEM PART NUMBER

DSMC Side Handle 720-0012

RED Switchblade-M

720-0026

REDMOTE 770-0006

REDLINK

Bridge (REDLINK Development Kit) 720-0028

1. The RED Switchblade-M requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.2.28 or later. Full functionality requires DSMC firmware v5.3 or later.

2. The REDLINK Bridge requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.2.28 or later.

DSMC SIDE HANDLE

The DSMC Side Handle provides programmable menu controls and a battery compartment that holds one (1)

REDVOLT battery. The DSMC Side Handle LCD display shows camera parameter values and illuminates for

operation in dark environments. When a REDVOLT is installed in the DSMC Side Handle, batteries connected

to other DSMC power modules may be hot-swapped, providing uninterrupted operation.

For a full list of DSMC Side Handle user keys and default actions, go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219.

NOTE: Upgrading your DSMC to v5.3 also upgrades the DSMC Side Handle. During the upgrade, you will be

instructed to shut down the DSMC twice so that the firmware upgrades successfully. Any DSMC Side Handle

that is upgraded to v5.3 can only be used with DSMCs running v5.2 or later. To use a DSMC Side Handle with

v5.1 after you’ve upgraded it to v5.3, first downgrade to v5.2, and then downgrade to v5.1.

DSMC Side Handle

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

RED SWITCHBLADE-M

The RED Switchblade-M is a low-profile and lightweight interface solution that mounts to the side of the DSMC

BRAIN. With a 1.7” OLED display and full navigation controls, the RED Switchblade-M grants full access to

DSMC menus while optimizing the size and weight of y our camera configuration.

For a full list of RED Switchblade-M user keys and default actions, go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219.

NOTE: The RED Switchblade-M requires DSMC firmware v5.2.28 or later. Full functionality requires DSMC

firmware v5.3 or later.

REDMOTE

The REDMOTE is a remote camera control unit for the DSMC that attaches to the rear of the BRAIN or rearmost

expansion module. The REDMOTE may be detached from the camera or rearmost module and provide wireless

remote control of the camera over the proprietary REDLINK protocol.

For a full list of REDMOTE user keys and default actions, go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219.

For more information, go to “REDMOTE Operation” on page 148.

IMPORTANT: To operate properly, upgrade both REDMOTE and DSMC firmware to the most recent version.

RED Switchblade-M

REDMOTE

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 32

REDLINK BRIDGE

The REDLINK Bridge is a wireless module that provides communication support for third-party app

development. The REDLINK Bridge attaches to the rear of the BRAIN or other compatible DSMC rear module.

The REDLINK Bridge is part of the REDLINK Development Kit and uses the REDLINK Command Protocol (RCP)

to communicate information between the DSMC and your application.

For more information, see the REDLINK Bridge Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

NOTE: The REDLINK Bridge requires DSMC firmware v5.2.8 or later.

REDLINK Bridge

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

LENS MOUNTS

RED offers the following DSMC lens mounts:

ITEM PART NUMBER

DSMC Mg PL Mount 2.0 725-0024

DSMC Ti PL Mount 725-0003

DSMC Al Canon Mount 725-0004

DSMC Ti Canon Mount 725-0005

DSMC Al Nikon Mount 725-0006

DSMC Ti Nikon Mount 725-0007

DSMC Al Leica-M Mount 725-0008

DSMC MOTION MOUNT Ti PL

725-0012

DSMC MOTION MOUNT Ti Canon

725-0014

1. The DSMC RED MOTION MOUNT requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.1.14 or later.

DSMC Mg PL Mount 2.0

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 34

INTERCHANGEABLE OLPFS

This section describes the interchangeable optical low pass filter (OLPF) system and modular OLPFs.

NOTE: The DSMC interchangeable OLPF system is only compatible with the DRAGON sensor.

The DSMC interchangeable OLPF system is an upgrade to the optical low-pass filter (OLPF) in your EPIC

DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON. The modular mounting system enables you to remove and replace OLPFs to

achieve optimal color reproduction in any lighting and environment.

For more information, go to “Interchangeable OLPF System” on page 44.

RED offers the following modular DSMC interchangeable OLPFs for EPIC DRAGON and SCARLET DRAGON:

ITEM LABEL

PART NUMBER REQUIRED FIRMWARE

DSMC Skin Tone-Highlight OLPF S 790-0461 v5.2.28 or later

DSMC Low Light Optimized OLPF L 790-0462 v5.2.28 or later

DSMC H

O OLPF H 790-0472 v5.3.29 or later

DSMC Standard OLPF D 790-0517 N/A

DSMC IR Pass OLPF (Color) I 790-0473 v5.3.33 or later

DSMC Monochrome OLPF

M 790-0481 v5.2.9 or later

DSMC IR Pass OLPF (Monochrome)

I 790-0474 v5.3.33 or later

1. Visible on the top inside part of the OLPF assembly.

2. Monochrome OLPFs are for use with the DRAGON MONOCHROME sensor ONLY.

RAILS, MOUNTS, TACTICAL GEAR, AND CABLES

RED offers a wide variety of support gear, mounting platforms, cables, accessories, and other equipment. For

more information, visit the RED Store at www.red.com/store.

DSMC Interchangeable

OLPF System

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 35

POWER OPERATIONS

This section describes the basic power operations of the DSMC

system.

For more information, see the DSMC Power Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

WARNING: Modules, displays, and accessories are NOT HOT SWAPPABLE, meaning that you cannot remove or

install the item while the camera is turned on. Before installing or removing a module, display, or accessory,

you MUST turn off the camera. Failure to do so may result in damage to the item or DSMC that is not covered

under warranty.

POWER INPUTS

There are two (2) primary power inputs that provide power to the DSMC BRAIN

# DSMC POWER INPUT DESCRIPTION

1 SEARAY power connector Provides power to the BRAIN from attached DSMC modules

2 DC IN connector Provides power to the BRAIN using a DSMC Power Adaptor or certain

battery modules, such as the Backpack Quickplate

NOTE: Additionally, one (1) REDVOLT

battery may be used in conjunction with the DSMC Side Handle to provide

short term power and support hot-swapping of other power sources.

SEARAY Connector (top) and

DC IN Connector (bottom)

EPIC/SCARLET

BASIC OPERATIONS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 36

POWER PRIORITY

When multiple power sources are connected to the BRAIN, power consumption is prioritized in this sequence:

1. DC power supply (DC IN connector)

2. Attached RED BRICK

(Lowest state of charge first)

3. Battery module batteries (SEARAY connector; lowest state of charge first)

4. REDVOLT battery in an attached DSMC Side Handle

POWER CONSUMPTION

The BRAIN draws approximately 60 W when recording in 5K resolution, at 24 FPS.

Under typical conditions batteries provide the following operating time:

 REDVOLT: Powers the BRAIN and accessories for approximately 30 minutes.

 REDVOLT XL: Powers the BRAIN and accessories for approximately 90 minutes.

 RED BRICK: Powers the BRAIN and accessories for approximately 120 minutes.

POWER STATUS

The power status of the current primary power source displays in the Lower Status Row of the graphical user

interface (GUI). Navigate to the Power In menu at Menu > Power > Power In for the status of all connected power

sources. For more information, go to “Power Menu” on page 129.

APPROVED EXTERNAL DC POWER

The camera accepts input voltages of 11.5 V to 17 V DC, and can draw a maximum current of 12 A. The BRAIN

can be powered continuously by connecting one (1) of the following to the DC IN port on the BRAIN:

 AC Power Adaptor (DSMC)

 RED BRICK Charger: Requires a 2B-to-1B Power Adaptor Cable.

 RED BRICK: Requires a Backpack Quickplate or Battery Belt Clip (DSMC). Also supported by a RED Quickplate

or RED Cradle using a 2B-to-1B Power Adaptor Cable.

 XLR DC power source: Requires an XLR Power Cable.

TURN ON THE BRAIN

1. Attach a power source to the BRAIN.

The Power Status LED illuminates red, indicating that an appropriate power source is connected.

2. Press and release the PWR/REC button on the right side of the BRAIN.

The Power Status LED turns off, and within five (5) seconds illuminates yellow as the BRAIN turns on.

The Power Status LED then illuminates green to confirm that the BRAIN is turned on and ready to use.

NOTE: The Power Status LED flashes red when there is less than five (5) minutes of operating time remaining.

TURN OFF THE BRAIN

Use one of the following methods to turn off the BRAIN:

 Go to Menu > Power and select Shutdown.

 Press and hold PWR/REC until the Shutting Down... notification shows on the display.

NOTE: The DSMC turns off automatically if the supply voltage drops to 11.5 V.

CONFIGURE YOUR DSMC

This section describes common options for configuring your DSMC system.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

INSTALL THE DSMC SIDE HANDLE

WARNING: Before installing or removing the DSMC Side Handle, you MUST turn off the BRAIN.

REQUIRED TOOL: T10 TORX

driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Use a T10 TORX driver to remove the single screw located at the bottom of the BRAIN side plate (if the

side plate is installed).

3. Rotate the BRAIN side plate upwards to disengage the lip at the top of the side plate from the BRAIN, and

remove the BRAIN side plate.

4. Insert the lip on the DSMC Side Handle into the slot where the lip of the BRAIN side plate was installed.

5. Press the DSMC Side Handle down flush along the side of the BRAIN.

6. Rotate the thumbscrew upward while applying steady pressure until tight.

REMOVE THE DSMC SIDE HANDLE

WARNING: Before installing or removing the DSMC Side Handle, you MUST turn off the BRAIN.

REQUIRED TOOL: T10 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Rotate the thumbscrew downward until the DSMC Side Handle detaches from the camera body.

3. Disengage the tension lip on the DSMC Side Handle by pulling the bottom away from the BRAIN.

4. Insert the tension lip on the BRAIN side plate into the recess on the side of the BRAIN.

5. Install the appropriate screw at the bottom of the BRAIN side plate using a T10 TORX driver. DO NOT

exceed 70 in-oz, or damage may occur.

‒ EPIC side plate screw: M3x0.5 x 8 mm

‒ SCARLET side plate screw: M3x0.5 x 5.5 mm

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

Remove the BRAIN side plate

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 38

INSTALL THE RED SWITCHBLADE-M

WARNING: Before installing or removing the RED Switchblade-M, you MUST turn off the BRAIN.

REQUIRED TOOL: T10 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Use a T10 TORX driver to remove the single screw located at the bottom of the BRAIN side plate (if the

side plate is installed).

3. Rotate the BRAIN side plate upwards to disengage the lip at the top of the side plate from the BRAIN, and

remove the BRAIN side plate.

4. Insert the lip on the RED Switchblade-M into the slot where the lip of the BRAIN side plate was installed.

5. Press the Switchblade-M down flush along the side of BRAIN.

6. Tighten the thumbscrew until finger-tight, then enage the thumbscrew mechanism.

REMOVE THE RED SWITCHBLADE-M

WARNING: Before installing or removing the RED Switchblade-M, you MUST turn off the BRAIN.

REQUIRED TOOL: T10 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Disengage the thumbscrew mechanism.

3. Loosen the thumbscrew until the Switchblade-M detaches from the BRAIN.

4. Pull the bottom of the RED Switchblade-M away from the BRAIN to disengage the tension lip.

5. Remove the RED Switchblade-M from the BRAIN.

6. Insert the tension lip on the BRAIN side plate into the recess on the side of the BRAIN.

7. Install the appropriate screw at the bottom of the BRAIN side plate using a T10 TORX driver. DO NOT

exceed 70 in-oz, or damage may occur.

‒ EPIC side plate screw: M3x0.5 x 8 mm

‒ SCARLET side plate screw: M3x0.5 x 5.5 mm

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

INSTALL THE MODULE ADAPTOR

You must install an adaptor module on the back of the BRAIN before you install a DSMC module.

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Remove the REDMOTE, if attached.

3. Position the Module Adaptor over the V-mount on the rear of the BRAIN.

4. Apply pressure and tighten the four (4) captive screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) approximately two (2)

turns each using a T20 TORX driver. DO NOT FULLY TIGHTEN.

5. Fully tighten the four (4) screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a T20 TORX driver.

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

Install Module Adaptor

Tighten screws

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 40

REMOVE THE MODULE ADAPTOR

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Use a T20 TORX driver to loosen the screws attaching the Module Adaptor to the BRAIN.

3. Remove the Module Adaptor from the BRAIN.

INSTALL THE +1 ADAPTOR MODULE

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Remove the REDMOTE, if attached.

3. Position the +1 Adaptor Module over the V-mount on the rear of the BRAIN.

Install the +1 Module

Adaptor

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

4. Insert the HDMI connector into the HDMI port on the BRAIN.

5. Apply pressure and tighten the four (4) captive screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) approximately two (2)

turns each using a T20 TORX driver. DO NOT FULLY TIGHTEN.

6. Fully tighten the four (4) screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a T20 TORX driver.

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

REMOVE THE +1 ADAPTOR MODULE

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Loosen the four (4) captive mounting screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a a T20 TORX driver.

3. Disconnect the HDMI connector from the BRAIN.

4. Remove the +1 Adaptor Module from the BRAIN.

Insert the HDMI

connector to the

BRAIN

Tighten screws

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 42

ATTACH A DSMC MODULE

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Insert the lip at the top of the module into the recess at the top of the adaptor module.

3. Rotate the module down flush with the rear of the adaptor module.

4. Apply pressure and use a T20 TORX driver to turn the lock on the bottom of the adaptor module clockwise

into the Lock position.

REMOVE A DSMC MODULE

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX driver

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Use a T20 TORX driver to turn the lock on the adaptor module counter-clockwise to the Unlock position.

3. Rotate the module upwards and away from the adaptor module to disengage.

4. Remove the module.

Insert module lip

Press module flush

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

REPLACE THE HOOD SCOOP

REQUIRED TOOL: T8 TORX driver

The hood scoop on some EPIC-X and EPIC-M models extends beyond the rear plane of the BRAIN. RED offers

shorter hood scoops so that you can attach an LCD or other accessory to the mounting locations on the top

of the +1 Adaptor Module.

To replace DSMC fan hood scoop, follow the instructions below:

1. Turn off the BRAIN.

2. Remove the four (4) M3x0.5 x 6 mm screws holding the hood scoop using a T8 TORX driver.

3. Remove the hood scoop.

4. Position the replacement hood scoop on the BRAIN.

5. Align the hood scoop screw holes with the threaded holes.

6. Insert and tighten the four (4) M3x0.5 x 6 mm screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a T8 TORX driver.

DO NOT FULLY TIGHTEN.

7. Fully tighten the four (4) M3x0.5 x 6 mm cap screws evenly in a cross pattern (“X” pattern). DO NOT exceed

30 in-oz, or damage may occur.

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

Replace the hood

scoop

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 44

INTERCHANGEABLE OLPF SYSTEM

This section describes the process for swapping an interchangeable OLPF.

WARNING: Read these instructions carefully and in their entirety before removing or installing an interchangeable

OLPF. Damage caused to the OLPF module, camera, or sensor due to improper handling or use is not covered

under warranty.

WARNING: Once an interchangeable OLPF is removed from the BRAIN, the sensor is exposed. Improper handling

of the OLPF modules or BRAIN during this procedure may compromise the installation or cause irreparable

damage to your camera or sensor.

WARNING: DO NOT allow any dirt or debris to enter the optical cavity.

WARNING: This procedure is ONLY applicable to DRAGON sensor cameras that are compatible with the DSMC

Interchangeable OLPF system.

WARNING: Use only DSMC OLPFs. DO NOT use WEAPON RED DRAGON OLPFs. For any questions about OLPF

compatibility, please contact your Bomb Squad representative.

SWAP AN INTERCHANGEABLE OLPF

REQUIRED TOOLS: T20 TORX driver, T6 TORX driver

1. Turn off the camera.

2. Remove any modules, cables, or other accessories that may interfere with operations.

3. Loosen and remove the four (4) M4x0.7 x 8 mm lens mount screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a

T20 TORX driver.

NOTE: The DSMC Mg PL Mount 2.0 has captive screws that are not removable from the mount.

NOTE: Screw removal may require a large handle T20 TORX driver and additional leverage.

4. Remove the lens mount.

5. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently wipe down the area around the lens mount and OLPF module. Remove

as much dust and debris as possible.

Remove Lens Mount

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

6. Remove the four (4) M2x0.4 x 4 mm OLPF module screws (P/N 600-0224) in a cross pattern (“X” pattern)

using a T6 TORX driver.

7. Remove the OLPF module and place it in its protective case.

Remove OLPF

module screws

Remove the OLPF

module

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 46

8. Use an LED light to ensure that the optical cavity is clean and free from dust or debris.

9. Ensure the desired OLPF module is clean and free of debris.

10. Insert the OLPF module.

11. Replace and loosely tighten the four (4) M2x0.4 x 4 mm OLPF module screws (P/N 600-0224) in a cross

pattern (“X” pattern) using a T6 TORX driver. DO NOT FULLY TIGHTEN.

12. Fully tighten the four (4) OLPF module screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a T6 TORX driver. DO

NOT exceed 30 in-oz, or damage may occur.

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

13. Replace the lens mount.

Ensure optical cavity

is clean and free of

debris

Replace the OLPF

module and screws

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

14. Replace and loosely tighten the four (4) M4x0.7 x 8 mm lens mount screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern)

using a T20 TORX driver. DO NOT FULLY TIGHTEN.

NOTE: The DSMC Mg PL Mount 2.0 has captive screws that are not removable from the mount.

15. Fully tighten the four (4) lens mount screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a T20 TORX driver. DO

NOT exceed 350 in-oz, or damage may occur.

NOTE: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

16. Turn on the BRAIN.

17. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > OLPF.

18. Select the installed OLPF from the Type drop-down menu.

IMPORTANT: Ensure the correct OLPF type is selected from the drop-down menu. Failure to select the

correct OLPF type will affect color accuracy. For more information, go to “OLPF” on page 122.

Replace Lens Mount

OLPF Type menu

selection

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 48

VERIFY INSTALLED OLPF

You can see which DSMC Interchangeable OLPF is installed even when a DSMC lens mount is attached. The

OLPF type is labeled in two (2) locations on each DSMC Interchangeable OLPF.

# LOCATION ON ASSEMBLY LABEL VISIBLE WITH

1 Top inside Identifier symbol, such as (S) DSMC PL mounts

2 Front bottom OLPF type All DSMC mounts

USE A TRIPOD OR MONOPOD

This section describes the DSMC mounting points and mounting equipment for use with a tripod or monopod.

The DSMC is equipped with two (2) 3/8-16 mounting holes and one (1) 1/4-20 mounting hole on the bottom

of the BRAIN. These mounting points are designed for use with a variety of mounting plates and hardware, to

support tripods and other support systems.

WARNING: Ensure that the tripod, monopod, or support system is designed and rated to handle the weight of

your DSMC configuration. RED is not responsible for any damage caused by using a tripod, monopod, mount,

or support system that does not provide sufficient support.

WARNING: DO NOT use excessive force to mount a support accessory, as this may damage the screw threading.

RED offers the following products for use with tripods and other support systems:

ITEM PART NUMBER

Mounting Plate (DSMC) 790-0094

DSMC Modular Assault Plate Pack 790-0224

DSMC Quick Release Platform Pack 790-0183

Quick Release Platform Pack (Bolt-On) 790-0078

Quick Release Platform (Dovetail) 790-0079

Quick Release Platform (Mini) 790-0390

Dovetail Mounting Plate (Long) 790-0083

Dovetail Mounting Plate (Short) 790-0084

For more information, visit the RED store at www.red.com/store.

OLPF Type Labels

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

VIDEO MONITOR OUTPUTS

The monitoring path converts RAW sensor data to a white balanced 12-bit depth 1920 x 1080 pixel RGB 4:4:4

video signal. The signal may be modified using ISO, White Balance, or other RGB color space adjustments. The

signal is then scaled and gamma-corrected to provide monitor outputs at 10-bit depth in 4:2:2 YCC or 8-bit

depth in 4:4:4 RGB.

The camera offers the following monitor outputs:

 EVF/LCD: Supports a RED EVF or LCD display.

 HD-SDI: Provides a 720p or 1080p output suitable for monitoring or recording to an external VTR or DDR

device. It may be configured for 10-bit LIN (VIDEO) or 10-bit LOG (FILM) encoded data.

 HDMI: Provides a 480p, 720p, or 1080p output suitable for monitoring via a Windows

monitor or most

HDTVs.

VIDEO MONITOR CATEGORIES

Video monitor outputs are separated into three (3) categories:

 VIEWFINDER: The Upper Status Row, Live Action Area, and Lower Status Row display. Default output is the

EVF/LCD connector located on the front face of the side SSD module. If an EVF or LCD is not connected,

you can transfer the VIEWFINDER output to either the HDMI or 3G-SDI (HD-SDI) output from the BRAIN.

 PROGRAM/Clean: None of the graphic overlays display.

 PREVIEW: The Live Action Area and associated graphic overlays display.

For more information about changing the video monitor category of your monitor, go to “Monitor Control” on

page 73.

RECORD

Perform one of the following actions to begin recording:

 Press PWR/REC on the BRAIN.

 Press REC on an attached side SSD module.

 Press REC on an attached DSMC Side Handle.

 Double-Tap Right 25% to Record on an attached touchscreen display (when enabled).

NOTE: To enable Double-Tap Right 25% to Record, go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control > Advanced

> Gestures.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 50

RECORD VIA HD-SDI OR HDMI

This section describes how to record via HD-SDI or HDMI through simultaneous record (recording to an SSD

and an external recorder at the same time) or external record only. For more information on how to enable

default menus for a external recorder, go to “Cannot Use Touchscreen or DSMC Side Handle” on page 179.

SIMULTANEOUS RECORD

You can record simultaneously to an external recorder and a RED SSD. To record simultaneously, follow the

instructions below:

1. Connect the BRAIN to an external recorder with an HD-SDI or HDMI cable.

2. Ensure an SSD is inserted in the camera and formatted.

3. Begin recording.

EXTERNAL RECORD

You can record to an external recorder without recording to an SSD. To record to an external device only, follow

the instructions below:

1. Connect the BRAIN to an external recorder with an HD-SDI or HDMI cable.

2. Ensure the SSD is ejected.

3. Go to Menu > Settings > Recording > Mode.

4. Select External from the Storage drop-down menu.

5. Begin recording.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 51

This chapter describes the DSMC

Basic Menu, controls, including:

 “Upper Status Row (Basic Menu)” on page 52

 “Live Action Area” on page 56

 “Lower Status Row” on page 57

 “Navigation Controls” on page 62

DSMC GUI MENU INTRODUCTION

This section describes the structure and layout of the DSMC graphical user interface (GUI) that overlays the

video monitor signal. Advanced GUI menu controls enable convenient access to menus, overlays, and other

critical camera information. Functionality varies based on monitor output type and firmware version.

The DSMC GUI menu is separated into three (3) main sections:

# ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 Upper Status Row

(Basic Menu)

Easy access to primary camera capture parameters.

Go to “Upper Status Row (Basic Menu)” on page 52.

2 Live Action Area Live camera recording view, overlays, guides, and more.

Go to “Live Action Area” on page 56.

3 Lower Status Row Critical camera parameters, record/playback modes, media and power status,

and audio meter. Go to “Lower Status Row” on page 57.

DSMC GUI Control Menu

BASIC MENUS

AND CONTROLS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 52

UPPER STATUS ROW (BASIC MENU)

The Upper Status Row displays basic project parameters. The currently selected parameter in the Upper Status

Row is underlined with a red bar. The Upper Status Row is also known as the Basic Menu.

1 52 8763 4

The Upper Status Row includes the following GUI elements:

# ITEM DESCRIPTION FOR MORE INFORMATION, GO TO...

1 Frame Rate (FPS) Recording frame rate “Frame Rate” on page 85

2 ISO Camera sensitivity “ISO” on page 81

3 Aperture Lens aperture (F stop) information “Aperture” on page 55

4 Exposure (Shutter) Integration time or shutter angle “Exposure” on page 90

5 Color Temperature White balance “Color Temperature” on page 84

6 Resolution Record resolution “Format” on page 91

7 REDCODE

REDCODE compression setting “REDCODE” on page 55

8 Menu Access advanced settings “Advanced Menus” on page 69

9 Cursor Indicates currently selected Upper

Status Row element

N/A

Upper Status Row

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

ACCESS ADVANCED MENUS

For every Upper Status Row item, (except for REDCODE) you can select the Advanced... button to access the

related menu in the Advanced Menus.

For example, select Advanced... in the Frame Rate menu to open Menu > Settings > Project > Frame Rate.

For more information about Advanced Menus, go to “Advanced Menus” on page 69.

Select “Advanced...”

Button

“Advanced...” Menu

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 54

FEATURE: EDIT LIST

Select the Edit List... button in the Upper Status Row menus to change the values that display for each setting.

For example, if you open the Frame Rate menu and select Edit List..., the camera lets you add or remove values

to available frame rates.

Select “Edit List...” Button

“Edit List...” Menu

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

APERTURE

The aperture (also known as the T stop or F stop) parameter displays when a compatible mount and lens are

installed. The aperture controls the depth of field of the image and, in combination with the shutter speed/angle

setting, controls the amount of light that reaches the sensor (exposure).

 Increasing the aperture to a higher number increases the depth of field, but reduces the exposure (brightness).

 Decreasing the aperture to a lower number decreases the depth of field, but increases the exposure

(brightness).

RED DSMC PL MOUNT INSTALLED

The current aperture of the attached lens displays when a DSMC PL mount is installed and a supported lens

equipped with Cooke

S4/i

system is attached.

DSMC NIKON MOUNT AND CANON MOUNT INSTALLED

The Aperture menu is visible when a DSMC Nikon

Mount, DSMC Canon

Mount, or DSMC RED MOTION MOUNT

Ti Canon is installed and a supported lens is attached. This enables you to adjust the aperture of the attached

lens.

Select the Advanced... button to access the Menu > Settings > Setup > Lens screen. For more information, go to

“Autofocus Modes (DSMC, Nikon, and Canon Mounts)” on page 132.

REDCODE

Select the target REDCODE compression ratio for your project.

If the camera is able to achieve the target compression ratio, the compression ratio displays in white. If the

camera is unable to achieve the target compression ratio, the compression ratio displays in yellow.

The current compression ratio is automatically recalculated when changes are made to the project resolution,

aspect ratio, anamorphic setting, frame rate, HDRx mode, media, or the target REDCODE compression ratio.

 MYSTERIUM-X: Range is 3:1 to 18:1. Default is 8:1.

 RED DRAGON: Range is 2:1 to 22:1. Default is 8:1.

For maximum available REDCODE values, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide at www.red.com/downloads.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 56

LIVE ACTION AREA

The Live Action Area contains the recorded image area plus Surround View look around area, plus overlays

for Frame Guides, Safe Action/Safe Title, Clip Name, and Timecode values. The color of each overlay can be

customized to maximize the contrast between the guide(s) and scene being captured.

The Live Action Area includes the following GUI elements:

# ITEM DESCRIPTION FOR MORE INFORMATION, GO TO...

1 Lens Information Lens information when using supported

Canon, Nikon, or Cooke lenses

“Lens Information” on page 56

2 AF Status Currently selected auto focus mode “Focus Menu” on page 130

3 Center Crosshair and

Spot Focus Guide

Crosshair: Center of selected guide

Reference guides: Safe Action/Safe Title,

Picture Center, Grid Overlay

“General Tab” on page 80

4 Frame Guides Record or sensor projection area “Guides” on page 79

5 Clip Filename Filename of the clip being recorded, or

filename of the next clip to be recorded

DSMC Media Operation Guide

6 Timecode Value Current timecode value “Timecode” on page 91

LENS INFORMATION

This section describes the lens information displays when a supported lens is attached.

PL LENSES

Displays the focal length and focal distance when a DSMC PL mount is installed and a lens with the Cooke S4/i

system (or equivalent) is attached. For more information, go to “Lens Tab” on page 79.

CANON AND NIKON LENSES

Displays the focal length and focal distance when a DSMC Canon Mount or a DSMC Nikon Mount is installed

and an electronically supported lens is attached. When AF is set to Manual or Confirm mode, the focus distance

displays as a pair of Near–Far distances. When in AF mode, a single estimated focus distance displays.

The focal length and focal distance values and range vary depending on the attached lens. When the focal

length of the lens changes, the current values displays. For more information, go to “Lens Tab” on page 79.

Live Action Area

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

LOWER STATUS ROW

The Lower Status Row provides access to key system information and camera values.

1 3 5 62

The Lower Status Row in Motion mode provides key system information and camera values, including:

# LOWER STATUS ROW ITEM SUB-ITEM/DESCRIPTION FOR MORE INFORMATION, GO TO...

1 Camera Mode Swipe up to toggle Motion/Stills/Playback

modes

“Camera Mode” on page 58

2 Histogram Histogram; tap to access the Tools menu “Histogram” on page 59

3 System Status

Indicators

Tap to access the System Status menu “System Status” on page 122

Temperature: Camera sensor and core

temperature, respectively

“Sensor Calibration” on page 111

Cal: T/E “CAL: T/E Indicator” on page 59

HDR: Displays when HDRx mode is on “HDRX Menu” on page 130

False Color Mode: Displays modes “False Color Modes” on page 70

Magnify: Tallies 1:1 if magnify is selected “Magnify” on page 72

Timecode “Timecode” on page 158

Genlock “GEN Indicator” on page 60

Sync “SYNC Indicator” on page 60

RM: Indicates link to REDMOTE “REDMOTE Operation” on page 148

LAN “LAN Indicator” on page 60

RIG: Indicates 3D rig metadata is present N/A

4 Media Status Media location and remaining media

capacity; tap to access the Media Menu

“Media Menu” on page 125

5 Power Status DC voltage in or % of remaining battery

capacity; tap to access the Power menu

“Power Status” on page 60

6 Audio Meter Audio input selection and levels;

tap to access the Audio menu

“Audio Meter Levels” on page 147

Lower Status Row: Motion

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 58

CAMERA MODE

The Camera Mode allows you to seamlessly toggle between Motion mode, Stills mode, and Playback. To select

a camera mode, select the Camera Mode icon in the Lower Status Bar, swipe up, and select a camera mode.

NOTE: Setting adjustments made in Stills mode do not affect the settings in Motion mode, and vice versa.

NOTE: You can also switch between Stills and Motion mode by using the Motion/Stills switch on the DSMC Side

Handle and REDMOTE.

You can select the following camera modes:

 “Motion Mode” on page 58

 “Stills Mode” on page 58

 “Playback Menu” on page 126

MOTION MODE

Motion mode optimizes your camera settings for capturing motion. This mode defaults the camera to Continuous

Record. Motion mode includes the following features:

 Motion recording modes:

‒ “Continuous Record” on page 99

‒ “Internal Timelapse Timer” on page 99

‒ “Frame Trigger” on page 99

‒ “Speed Ramp Mode” on page 100

‒ “REDCODE Burst” on page 100

 Swipe-Up Shortcuts

‒ Camera Mode

‒ Tools

‒ Media

‒ Power

NOTE: For more information, go to “Swipe-Up Menu” on page 63.

 Default Motion Preset (RED)

NOTE: For more information, go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219.

STILLS MODE

Stills mode optimizes your camera settings for capturing stills. In Stills mode, the camera defaults to 6K 3:2,

REDCODE 3:1, Auto Exposure Single Shot, and Multi-Shot mode. Stills mode includes the following features:

 Stills recording modes:

‒ “Multi-Shot” on page 101

‒ “Motion + Stills” on page 102

 Swipe-Up Shortcuts:

‒ Auto Exposure

‒ Auto Focus

‒ Record Mode

NOTE: For more information, go to “Swipe-Up Menu” on page 63.

 Default Stills Preset (RED)

NOTE: For more information, go to “Preset Default Key Functions” on page 222.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

HISTOGRAM

This section describes the elements that comprise the Histogram section in the Lower Status Row. This section

of the GUI helps ensure that recorded footage is properly exposed.

Tap the Histogram in the Lower Status Row to access the Tools menu. For more information, go to “Tools” on

page 70.

# ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 RAW Level Bar (left)

Also known as a “goal post”. Displays the amount of pixels in the image that

are underexposed (noise)

2 RAW Level Bar (right)

Also known as a “goal post”. Displays the amount of pixels in the image that are

overexposed (clipping)

3 RGB Histogram Provides a visual representation of exposure and sensor data levels for Red,

Green, and Blue channels; meter is affected by White Balance, ISO, and VIEW/

LOOK settings

4 RAW Clip Meter Also known as “traffic lights”. Provides a visual representation of exposure and

sensor data levels for Red, Green, and Blue channels; Circles (traffic lights) will

light up when clipping occurs

1. The RAW Level Bars display the amount of pixels in the image that are noisy or clipped in relation to the total number of pixels in the

image. For example, if the left RAW Level Bar is 1/8 of the total height, that means that approximately 1/8 of the total pixels in the total

image are at an exposure level that is at risk of displaying noise when pushed to higher ISO or FLUT

values in post production.

SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS

This section describes the colors and behavior of the System Status indicators in the Lower Status Row. Tap

the System Status indicators in the Lower Status Row to access the System Status menu. For more information,

go to “System Status” on page 122.

CAL: T/E INDICATOR

The CAL: T/E indicator shows changes to temperature (T) or exposure (E) in relation to the active calibration

map. If the temperature or exposure change significantly, black shade the camera at the desired temperature

and exposure. Failure to properly calibrate the sensor may reduce image quality.

 Green: Sensor temperature or exposure are properly calibrated for current settings.

 Yellow: Slight change in sensor temperature or exposure.

 Red: Significant change in sensor temperature or exposure.

 The – and + indicate whether the sensor temperature or exposure has decreased or increased, respectively.

NOTE: T and E indicators change colors independently of each other.

Histogram (Exposure)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 60

TC INDICATOR

The TC indicator shows the current timecode status.

 Gray: No analog timecode is detected.

 Red: Analog timecode is detected but not enabled.

 Green: Analog timecode is used to jam the time of day timecode.

For more information, go to “Timecode, Genlock, Multi-Camera Setup” on page 158.

GEN INDICATOR

The GEN indicator shows the current genlock status.

 Gray: No genlock signal is detected, or the signal cannot cross-lock to project (24.00 FPS vs. 23.98 FPS).

 Red: During process of sync, or genlock is lost while recording.

 Green: A genlock signal matching the current HD-SDI monitor rate is locked.

 Yellow: Timing is cross-locked to compatible but not matching monitor rate. For example, genlock is 24.00

FPS, and HD-SDI monitor rate is 25.00 FPS.

NOTE: When the GEN indicator is yellow, DO NOT perform 3D operation. This warns that genlock source

settings and camera settings are not aligned, so phasing of the sync between cameras is not guaranteed.

For more information, go to “Timecode, Genlock, Multi-Camera Setup” on page 158.

SYNC INDICATOR

The SYNC indicator shows the current sensor sync status, based on genlock.

 Gray: The sensor sync mode is not set to genlock.

 Red: The sensor sync mode is set to genlock, but is not locked to a genlock signal. This may occur if

genlock or sensor sync is lost while recording.

 Green: The sensor sync mode and HD-SDI monitor rate are locked to a compatible genlock signal.

For more information, go to “Timecode, Genlock, Multi-Camera Setup” on page 158.

LAN INDICATOR

The LAN indicator shows the current status of an external LAN connection through the Gig-E port.

 Gray: External control of the camera is not enabled.

 Yellow: If the LAN indicator is yellow, external camera control is not possible. For more information, go to

“Cannot Control Camera Externally” on page 177.

POWER STATUS

The Power Status element displays the current supply voltage or remaining battery capacity. Tap the Power

Status element to access the Power menu. For more information, go to “Power Menu” on page 129.

DC IN SUPPLY VOLTAGE

When powering the DSMC via DC power, the current voltage displays. When powering the DSMC using batteries,

the remaining battery capacity displays. The remaining capacity is indicated by the following colors:

 Green: 12.0 V and up

 Yellow: 11.8 V to 11.9 V

 Red: 11.6 V to 11.7 V

NOTE: The DSMC turns off automatically if the supply voltage drops to 11.5 V.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

BATTERY TIME REMAINING

When using a REDVOLT or REDVOLT XL battery, the power status displays the location of the power

source(example: SH: DSMC Side Handle; RM: Rear Module) and the remaining battery capacity. When using a

RED BRICK battery connected to DC IN, the power status displays BRICK and the remaining battery capacity.

The color of the displayed battery capacity represents the amount of time remaining:

 Green: >10 minutes

 Yellow: 5 to 10 minutes

 Red: <5 minutes

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 62

NAVIGATION CONTROLS

This section describes basic controls for navigating the DSMC menus.

TOUCHSCREEN NAVIGATION

RED Touch displays offer intuitive menu control and four (4) programmable buttons.

# RED TOUCH BUTTON DESCRIPTION

1 User Key 1 Toggle 1:1 Magnify on/off

2 Up Button Increase display brightness

3 Down Button Decrease display brightness

4 User Key 2 Toggle Exposure Mode on/off

NOTE: RED Touch display keys are programmable. For more information, go to “Key Mapping” on page 104.

Navigate the menus using a touchscreen by using the following gestures:

 Tap: Tap has many functions:

‒ Tap to select a Basic Menu, submenu, or button.

‒ If a menu is open, tap anywhere outside the menu to save any changes and close the menu.

‒ Tap the right or left regions of the touchscreen to access the programmable soft keys.

 Swipe: Swipe to select different values in spinners or drop-down menus. For more information, go to

“Swipe-Up Menu” on page 63.

 Double-Tap: If the monitor is in Clean mode, changes to Overlay mode.

 Hold: Tap and hold an icon to bring up an advanced interface display.

 Pinch: Move two (2) fingers apart/together to increase/decrease the size of the image. By default, this

gesture is disabled.

For more information, go to “Gestures” on page 77.

RED Touch 7.0" LCD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SWIPE-UP MENU

The Swipe-Up Menu is available in the Lower Status Row on RED Touch displays and provides Swipe-Up

Shortcuts for Motion mode, Stills mode, and Playback.

NOTE: Swipe-Up shortcuts are available on v6.0 firmware or later.

For example, select the Camera Mode icon in the Lower Status Bar, swipe up, and select a Camera Mode.

1 42 3 5 6 7

# SWIPE-UP SHORTCUT DESCRIPTION

1 Camera Mode

Select Playback, Motion, or Stills

2 Tools Set Horizon, RAW, Magnify, and False Color

3 Media View as Percentage or Time Remaining, eject media, view clip thumbnails

4 Power View as Percentage or Time Remaining

5 Auto Focus

Set Zone, Size, and Mode

6 Auto Exposure

Set Exp Comp, Speed, Metering, Priority, and Mode

7 Record Mode

Select Multi-Shot or Motion + Stills

1. For more information about Stills mode and Motion mode, go to “Camera Mode” on page 58.

2. Shortcuts only available in Stills Mode.

Swipe Up to Select a

Camera Mode

Stills Mode

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 64

NAVIGATION GROUP

The Navigation Group is the primary control interface on the DSMC Side Handle, RED Switchblade-M, and

REDMOTE.

# NAVIGATION GROUP ELEMENT DESCRIPTION

1 Scroll Wheel Select and adjust the value of a selected setting

2 Directional Keys (D-Pad) Navigate menus and menu items

3 ENTER Button Press ENTER to confirm a setting or access the selected menu

Navigate the menus using a DSMC Side Handle, RED Switchblade-M, or REDMOTE using the following controls:

 Press ENTER to open the menu, then rotate the Scroll Wheel clockwise to move right, counterclockwise to

move left to highlight the desired menu or parameter. Press ENTER to select.

 Press the Up Navigation Key to open the related Advanced Settings menu, if one (1) is available.

For more information, go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219.

For more information on the REDMOTE, go to “REDMOTE Operation” on page 148.

Navigation Group

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DSMC SIDE HANDLE

This section describes the controls and display of the DSMC Side Handle.

# CONTROL/ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 LCD Display Go to “DSMC Side Handle Display” on page 66

2 User Keys (1–4)

User 1-4 keys are used to select a slot on the DSMC Side Handle Display. The

front rotary then adjusts the value of the selected slot.

3 Menu Button Access menus or exit currently selected menu

4 Rocker Switch Open (Up)/Close (Down) Iris

5 User Keys (5–7) 5: Toggle Exposure Mode on/off

6: Key Disabled

7: Eject Media

6 Thumbwheel Lock Install and remove the DSMC Side Handle

7 LCD Backlight Button Toggles LCD backlight illumination

8 Navigation Group Navigate menus and menu items; go to “Navigation Group” on page 64

9 User Keys (A–D) A: Cycle Auto-Focus Mode

B: Auto White Balance

C: Toggle 1:1 Magnify on/off

D: Toggle Exposure Mode on/off

10 Rotary Dial Adjust camera parameter values based on the underlined value on the

DSMC Side Handle LCD Display

11 Focus/Record Button Half-press for auto-focus; full press to Start/Stop Record

12 Stills/Motion Mode Switch Toggles between Stills/Motion Mode, enabled in v6.0 firmware or later

13 Battery Door Release Press to open the battery door

14 PC Sync Port Triggers external flashes or strobes

1. Press User Keys 1 + 4 simultaneously to lock/unlock DSMC Side Handle buttons to prevent inadvertent menu changes.

NOTE: DSMC Side Handle keys are programmable. For more information, go to “Key Mapping” on page 104.

DSMC Side Handle

Controls

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 66

DSMC SIDE HANDLE DISPLAY

The DSMC Side Handle displays Basic Menu parameters and other system status information.

The DSMC Side Handle displays the following camera parameters:

# DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 Calibration Indicator of relative change in sensor temperature and exposure since

last calibration

2 Recording Frame Rate Current recording frame rate

3 White Balance Color temperature

4 Resolution Recording resolution

5 ISO Camera sensor sensitivity

6 Temperature Displays camera sensor and core temperature, respectively

7 Lens Information Displays aperture when a supported Canon, Nikon, or Cooke lens is

attached

8 REDCODE REDCODE compression setting

9 Cursor User 1-4 keys are used to move the cursor to select a slot. The front rotary

then adjusts the value of the selected slot.

10 Shutter Speed Integration time or shutter angle

11 Media Status Displays media location and remaining media capacity

12 Power Status Indicates DC supply voltage or % of remaining battery capacity including

current supply voltage

DSMC Side Handle

Display

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

RED SWITCHBLADE-M

This section describes the controls and display of the RED Switchblade-M.

# CONTROL/ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 User Keys (A–D)

A: Cycle Auto-Focus Mode

B: Auto White Balance

C: Toggle 1:1 Magnify

D: Toggle Exposure Mode

2 MENU Button

Access menus or exit currently selected menu

3 MODE Button Toggle RED Switchblade-M between Remote and Local Modes

4 Navigation Group Navigate menus and menu items; Go to “Navigation Group” on page 64

5 Mounting Thumbscrew Install and remove the RED Switchblade-M

1. Press User Keys A + D simultaneously to lock/unlock RED Switchblade-M buttons to prevent inadvertent menu changes.

2. MODE Button functionality requires DSMC firmware v5.3 or later.

NOTE: RED Switchblade-M keys are programmable. For more information, go to “Key Mapping” on page 104.

OPERATION MODES

The RED Switchblade-M OLED display reflects the currently selected mode. Use the Scroll Wheel and Directional

Keys to navigate menus. Press MENU to access the Advanced Menu.

Press MODE to toggle between the following modes:

 Remote Mode: Navigate with RED Switchblade-M controls, using an attached LCD, EVF, or other monitor as

a reference. The RED Switchblade-M displays the primary control screen.

 Local Mode: Navigate using the RED Switchblade-M controls and display. User Keys A-D are inactive.

KEY LOCK/UNLOCK

Lock the keys on the RED Switchblade-M to prevent inadvertent button presses and menu changes.

 Lock: Press A + D simultaneously.

 Unlock: Press A + D simultaneously. Alternatively, press and hold ENTER while keys are locked.

RED Switchblade-M

Controls

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 68

RED SWITCHBLADE-M DISPLAY

The RED Switchblade-M OLED display provides basic camera parameters during operation.

5 6 7

The RED Switchblade-M displays the following camera parameters:

# DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 Frame Rate Current Recording Frame Rate

2 Lens Information Displays aperture when a supported Canon, Nikon, or Cooke lens is

attached

3 White Balance Color temperature

4 REDCODE REDCODE compression setting

5 Media Status Displays media location and remaining media capacity

6 Timecode Current timecode value

7 Power Status Indicates DC supply voltage or % of remaining battery capacity including

current supply voltage

8 Color and Gamma Space Currently selected RED color and gamma space settings

9 Resolution Recording resolution

10 Shutter Speed Integration time or shutter angle

11 ISO Camera sensor sensitivity

RED Switchblade-M OLED

(Local Mode)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 69

DSMC ADVANCED MENUS

b nvvb

The Advanced Menus include:

ADVANCED MENU DESCRIPTION FOR MORE INFORMATION, GO TO...

Settings Camera settings including: Display, Look, Project,

Audio, Recording, Setup, and Maintenance

“Settings Menu” on page 70

Media SSD operations including: format, eject, and more “Media Menu” on page 125

Playback View clips recorded to the attached SSD “Playback Menu” on page 126

Power Power sources, settings, status, and shutdown “Power Menu” on page 129

HDRX HDRx mode and settings “HDRX Menu” on page 130

Focus Focus modes, features, settings, and rack focus “Focus Menu” on page 130

Exposure Assist Automatic exposure settings and controls “Exposure Assist” on page 136

Presets Adjust Looks, key mappings, I/O, and more “Presets Menu” on page 138

ACCESS THE ADVANCED MENUS

 Tap the Menu button on the DSMC

Side Handle or REDMOTE

 Tap the Menu icon on the touchscreen.

 Select the Advanced... button in any menu from the Upper Status Row (except the REDCODE menu).

DSMC Advanced Menu

ADVANCED

MENUS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 70

SETTINGS MENU

The Settings menu includes: Display, Look, Project, Audio, Recording, Setup, and Maintenance.

DISPLAY

The Display menu includes: Tools, Zebra, Monitor Control, Modes, Guides, Test Signals, and REDCAST™ (the

REDCAST menu is only accessible when a REDCAST Module is installed).

TOOLS

The Tools menu provides access to false color and display modes.

For more information, see the Exposure with RED Cameras: False Color & Zebra Tools article, available at www.

red.com/learn/red-101/exposure-false-color-zebra-tools.

FALSE COLOR MODES

False color modes include: Off, Exposure, Video, Focus, Edge, and Gio Scope.

NOTE: Only monitors with the Tools check box selected in the Monitor Control menu show the false colors. For

more information, go to “Motor Control” on page 110.

NOTE: False color modes affect video recorded through HDMI

or HD-SDI to an external recorder if the Tools

check box is selected in the Monitor Control menu. When recording through HDMI or HD-SDI, use false color

modes only to help configure project settings, and then disable the mode before recording.

OFF

Disables all false color modes.

EXPOSURE

Displays color overlay on top of a desaturated image that allows you to check for proper exposure. When

enabled, the “E√” indicator displays in the Lower Status Row.

The Exposure meter colors indicate the following information:

 Purple: Underexposed; indicates sensor exposure levels that may be noisy if gained up in post-production.

 Green: IRE 41–48; based on the RGB levels of the video out signal and not the RAW data.

 Red: Overexposed; indicates sensor exposure levels that are clipping.

Purple (underexposure) and red (overexposure) are based on RAW data and show areas that are clipping or

close to clipping. The RGB settings (settings in the Look menu) DO NOT affect the Exposure indicators.

Settings Menu

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

VIDEO

Displays a color overlay that indicates the video level of the RGB monitor path (calibrated to the SMPTE test

signal). When enabled, the “V√” indicator displays in the Lower Status Row.

Colors are based on the RGB levels of the video out signal (that is, the “cooked” look, and not RAW data). The

RGB settings (settings in the Look menu) affect the Video indicators.

The Video indicators represent the following IRE values (at all other values, the desaturated image represents

the luminance value of the ISO adjusted image):

 Purple: IRE 0–4

 Blue: IRE 5

 Teal: IRE 10–12

 Green: IRE 41–48

 Pink: IRE 61–70

 Straw: IRE 92–93

 Yellow: IRE 94–95

 Orange: IRE 96–98

 Red: IRE 99–100

FOCUS

Emphasizes contrast and edges in the image without changing brightness or image content making it easier to

judge focus. Adjust zoom and focus to easily see which objects are coming into focus. When enabled, the “F√”

indicator displays in the Lower Status Row.

EDGE

Shows the edges/outlines of objects that are in focus. When enabled, the “F√” indicator displays in the Lower

Status Row.

NOTE: The Edge setting may interfere with recordings done via HDMI or HD-SDI in Clean mode.

GIO SCOPE

Displays a color overlay on top of a desaturated image, identifying the 16 stops of light within the full dynamic

range of the RED DRAGON

sensor. On cameras with the MYSTERIUM-X

sensor, you can still select up to 16

stops. However, the camera will not detect the top and bottom stops.

When enabled, the “G√” indicator displays in the Lower Status Row. The Gio Scope indicators are based on

RAW data. The RGB settings (settings in the Look menu) DO NOT affect the indicators.

Each number indicates a different stop of light.

 11: Represents mid-gray.

 16: Represents the top stop, and is broken up into 1/8th increments to show highlight roll-off. Each 1/8th

stop is represented by a different shade of red, ranging from light red (less light) to dark red (most light).

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 72

DISPLAY MODES

Display mode options include: Magnify, RAW, and Horizon.

MAGNIFY

Displays the central region of the sensor in 1:1 pixel resolution. When enabled, the 1:1 text in the Lower Status

Row turns green, and the AF Window and the magnified region display. The AF Window determines the center

point of the magnified region. If the lens or lens mount is not capable of autofocus with the DSMC, use Confirm

mode to turn on the AF Window. The camera automatically exits magnify mode when recording begins.

The Magnify tool magnifies a 1920 x 1020 region, centered on a 1920 x 1080 display. If the resolution is lower

than 1920 x 1020, the image border cannot be magnified. Use the following equations to determine the area of

the image border that will not be magnified:

 Border width: (1920 – W) / 2

 Border height: (1020 – H) / 2

NOTE: Frame rate and resolution cannot be modified in Magnify mode.

RAW

Displays images unaffected by the RGB settings (settings in the Look menu). When enabled, the word RAW

displays in the Histogram in the Lower Status Row.

The RAW image parameters are:

 Color Space: REDcolor2

 Gamma Space: REDlogFilm

 White Balance: 5600K

 ISO: 800 ISO

 Tint: 0 Tint

NOTE: When enabled, RAW affects video recorded via HDMI or HD-SDI to an external recorder. Otherwise, RAW

image parameters DO NOT affect image metadata; the parameters only affect the monitor output.

HORIZON

Displays an overlay that provides a reference to the position of the horizon. The Horizon overlay consists of two

(2) short side-bars that are always horizontally centered on the monitor, and a single longer horizon-line that

adjusts to the horizon based on the orientation of the DSMC BRAIN

The side-bars are green if the pitch is within +/– 1° of the calibrated zero position, otherwise they are red. The

horizon-line is green if the roll is within +/– 1° of the calibrated zero position, otherwise it is red.

To add numerical values for the pitch and roll to the Horizon overlay, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control > Overlay.

2. Select Create..., Clone..., or Edit..., respectively, for the desired overlay action.

3. Select a location on the interface to add the numerical data for the Horizon overlay.

4. Select Motion: Gyro Data (GYRO) from the Item drop-down menu.

5. Select the desired text size.

6. Select Add.

7. Select Save.

8. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control > Monitor, and select the overlay from the Overlay drop-

down menu.

NOTE: The internal gyroscope and accelerometer must be calibrated for the Horizon overlay to function properly.

For more information, go to “Gyroscope and Accelerometer Calibration” on page 114.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

ZEBRA

Use Zebra mode to enable and adjust the upper and lower values for two (2) independent zebra indicators. Use

Zebra 1 for highlight exposure, and use Zebra 2 for mid-tones or shadows. Zebras are visible in Magnify mode

and are disabled by default. As with other IRE-based modes, zebra mode is applicable to the current ISO and

Look settings, and not the RAW image.

For more information, see the Exposure with RED Cameras: False Color & Zebra Tools article, available at www.

red.com/learn/red-101/exposure-false-color-zebra-tools.

ENABLE ZEBRA INDICATORS

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Zebra.

2. Select a Zebra check box.

3. Select the low and high IRE values. Each value range is 1–100.

‒ Zebra 1: Areas of the image exposed within the IRE range are indicated by diagonal lines at –45°. De-

fault is IRE 98–100.

‒ Zebra 2: Areas of the image exposed within the IRE range are indicated by diagonal lines at 45°. Default

range is IRE 41–48.

MONITOR CONTROL

Use the Monitor Control menu to configure monitor and overlay settings, control surface priorities, brightness,

and gestures.

MONITOR

Select the monitor to configure from the drop-down menu at the top of the menu. The other settings on the

menu are applicable to the selected monitor.

NOTE: Changes to Monitor Control settings take effect when you close the menu.

MODE

Determines the elements displayed on the monitor:

 Clean: Only the video displays. The Upper Status Row, Lower Status Row, and overlays do not display.

 Overlay: The overlay displays. Overlays include the Upper Status Row and the Lower Status Row.

 Mirror: The monitor mirrors another screen at the same resolution. You cannot mirror a screen that is set

to Clean. The Mirror option is available based on the settings of the other attached monitors, and includes

the name of the monitor that can be mirrored.

NOTE: You can set a maximum of four (4) monitors to Overlay at a time. To assign additional monitors to Overlay,

mirror a monitor with the same resolution that is set to Overlay.

NOTE: When two (2) touchscreens are attached to the DSMC with the same resolution and one (1) is currently

the control surface, set the other to mirror it and give the effect of having two (2) control surfaces.

OVERLAY

Select which overlay shows on top of the video. RED

provides preset overlays, which have “(RED)” in the

overlay name. Create custom overlays in the Overlay tab. For more information, go to “Overlays” on page 75.

RESOLUTION

Select the output resolution for monitors (you cannot select a resolution for LCDs and EVFs, since the resolution

is determined automatically). For more information about available HD-SDI and HDMI resolutions, go to “3G-SDI

(HD-SDI) Out” on page 202 and “HDMI Out” on page 203.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 74

FREQUENCY

Determines the monitor frequency. Available frequencies depend on the selected monitor. The LCD resolution

defaults to 60.00 Hz, which is the optimal refresh rate for the RED LCDs.

For HD-SDI monitors, the frequency depends on the project time base. For more information, go to “3G-SDI

(HD-SDI) Out” on page 202 and “HDMI Out” on page 203.

CURVE

Determines which curve the camera applies to the monitor when using the Independent Display LUT feature.

For more information, go to “Independent Display LUT” on page 82.

TOOLS

Enables the false color modes on the monitor. For more information, go to “Tools” on page 70.

FLIP/MIRROR UI

NOTE: This setting is NOT available on the RED Touch 7.0" LCD. For more information, go to “Flip/Mirror” on

page 74.

Flip the graphical user interface (GUI) vertically and mirror horizontally (not rotated). Use this setting when

mounting a monitor upside down. This setting only affects the monitor, and does not affect captured footage.

FLIP VIDEO

NOTE: This setting is NOT available on the RED Touch 7.0" LCD. For more information, go to “Flip/Mirror” on

page 74.

Flip footage horizontally, so that it is upside down. This setting only affects the monitor, and does not affect

captured footage.

FLIP/MIRROR

NOTE: This setting is ONLY available on the RED Touch 7.0" LCD.

Mirror and flip (invert) the graphical user interface (GUI) and footage, effectively rotating the entire displayed

image 180°. Use this setting when mounting a monitor or the entire camera rig upside down. This setting only

affects the monitor, and does not affect captured footage.

FRAMED OVERLAY

The video display is scaled down on the monitor so that the overlay items fit outside of the video area rather

than over it. This setting only affects the monitor, and does not affect captured footage.

AUTO HIDE MENUS

Hides the Upper Status Row and Lower Status Row. When this option is disabled, the video is scaled so that

the menus are not overlaid on the video. When this option is enabled, the video is not scaled. This option

creates a control surface on a monitor without scaling the video. This setting only affects the monitor, and does

not affect captured footage.

To toggle display/hide the menus when Auto Hide Menus is enabled, perform either of the following actions:

 Press the Menu button on the DSMC Side Handle.

 Tap the touchscreen.

NOTE: Enabling this option on a non-control surface results in the menus never displaying on that monitor.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

OVERLAYS

Create custom overlays that include specific items. Overlays can be stored on the camera or transferred to SSD

to be shared with other cameras.

 Camera: Overlays saved internally on the camera display in the Overlay drop-down menu on the Monitor

Control > Monitor tab.

 Media: Overlays saved to an SSD can be found at On Media: \overlays:.

NOTE: Overlays that end with (RED) are provided by default and cannot be edited, deleted, or exported.

OVERLAY ACTIONS

 Create...: Create a new custom overlay using a blank overlay template in the Overlay Editor.

 Clone...: Create a new custom overlay using the selected camera overlay as a template in the Overlay Editor.

 Edit...: Edit the selected camera overlay in the Overlay Editor.

 Delete: Delete the selected camera overlay.

EXPORT AND IMPORT OVERLAYS

 : Export selected overlay from camera to SSD.

 All : Export all overlays from camera to SSD.

 : Import selected overlay from SSD to camera.

 All: Import all overlays from SSD to camera.

CREATE AND EDIT OVERLAYS

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control > Overlay.

2. Select Create, or select an existing overlay and select Clone or Edit.

3. If creating a new overlay, enter a name for the overlay and select OK.

4. Select any of the following check boxes to add the corresponding guides to the overlay:

‒ Frame Guide

‒ Action Guide

‒ Title Guide

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 76

5. Select a button on the matrix to add a user interface element to that position on the matrix.

By default, the Magnify indicator (MI) is on the top left, the Record indicator (REC) is on the top right, the

Clip Name (CLIP) is on the bottom left, and the Timecode (TC) is on the bottom right.

Selecting one (1) of the buttons opens a new dialog that lets you choose a user interface element.

6. Select the Item that you want to add.

7. Select the Size of the item.

8. If adding a Custom Label (LBL), enter the Custom Text for that item.

9. Select Add to return to the previous screen.

10. Add all of the items to the overlay.

11. Select Create or Save.

The new overlay displays in the Camera list.

NOTE: Except for the Custom Label (LBL), you can only add each element once. If you add an element you have

already added to the overlay, the element moves to the new position.

LUTS

The LUTs menu is only accessible when a REDCAST Module is installed. For more information, see the REDCAST

Module Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

PRIORITY

The camera can only have one (1) control monitor for interacting with camera settings. The Priority tab determines

the order in which a monitor becomes the control monitor. If you plan on removing or adding monitors during a

shoot, set up the priority list ahead of time.

For a monitor to become the control monitor, the following must occur:

 The monitor must be set to Overlay mode in the Monitor Control menu.

 Each monitor that has higher priority on the list must be either detached or not set to Overlay mode.

EXAMPLE

By default, the monitor priority is:

1. BRAIN LCD

2. BRAIN EVF

3. BRAIN HDMI

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

If you remove an LCD when an EVF is attached, then the EVF becomes the control monitor. If you then remove

the EVF when an HDMI monitor is attached, the HDMI monitor becomes the control monitor. If you then re-

attach the LCD, then the LCD is the control monitor again.

BRIGHTNESS

Control the brightness of each LCD and EVF. Move to the right for a brighter display; move to the left for a

dimmer display. Side UI LCD controls the brightness of the Switchblade-M LCD.

NOTE: A rear LCD/EVF is an LCD/EVF that is plugged into any rear RED module, such as the +1 Adaptor Module

or the Pro I/O Module.

ADVANCED

Provides access to additional monitor settings.

GESTURES

 Pinch to Magnify: Move two (2) fingers apart or together to toggle 1:1 Magnify. For more information, go to

“Magnify” on page 72.

 Double-Tap Right 25% to Record: Double-tap the right 25% of the video area on the LCD to toggle record.

 Double-Tap Left 25% to Start AF: Double-tap the left 25% of the video area on the LCD to start autofocus

when compatible lenses are used.

For a list of compatible lenses, go to “Lens Mounts and Lenses” on page 209.

OTHER

 Lock Touch Screen: Touchscreen control is locked. To unlock, tap the screen and follow the on-screen

instructions.

 Use Small Dialogs on 9" LCD: The dialogs on the RED Touch 9.0" LCD are smaller than the default dialogs.

GENLOCK OFFSET

Offset the video of the selected output (HDSDI or REDCAST Module) to align it with the genlock signal:

 Negative offset: Advances the video, so the video reaches the switcher earlier than it would otherwise.

 Positive offset: Advances the video, so the video reaches the switcher later than it would otherwise.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 78

MODES

Use the Modes menu to determine how the following settings display:

 Camera

 Lens

CAMERA TAB

EXPOSURE

 Time (Absolute): Displays the exposure time in seconds (1/xx sec). When you change the frame rate in this

mode, the shutter time stays the same, but the shutter angle changes. Time (Absolute) is the default.

 Angle (Relative): Displays the exposure as an angle (1–360°). When you change the frame rate in this mode,

the shutter angle stays the same, but the exposure time changes.

POWER

 Current Batt %: Displays the remaining percentage of active battery. (Default)

 Total Time: Displays the total run-time left of battery power, taking into account all available batteries.

VU METER

 Input: Displays levels of audio inputs (pre-mixer). (Default)

 Output: Displays levels of audio outputs (post-mixer).

HISTOGRAM

NOTE: The Histogram setting is not accessible on BRAINs with MONOCHROME or RED DRAGON MONOCHROME

sensors.

 RGB: Displays red, green, and blue channels on histogram. (Default)

 Luma: Displays luma channel on histogram.

MEDIA

 Percentage: Displays media space remaining as a percentage. (Default)

 Time Remaining: Displays media space remaining as time in hours and minutes (HHH:MM).

Display Mode: Camera

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

LENS TAB

APERTURE

 1/4 F#: Aperture increments in 1/4 stops.

 1/3 F#: Aperture increments in 1/3 stops. (Default)

FOCUS DISTANCE

 Metric: Displays lens focus distances in meters.

 Imperial: Displays lens focus distances in feet and inches. (Default)

MOTION MOUNT ND AND MOTION MOUNT ISO PULL

Only applicable when using a DSMC RED MOTION MOUNT

. For more information, see the RED MOTION MOUNT

Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

RACK SHOW DISTANCE

 On: Displays the focus distance of each rack point on the Live Action Area when rack focus is enabled. For

more information, go to “Set Up Rack Focus” on page 134.

 Off: Does not display the focus distance of rack points when rack focus is enabled. (Default)

GUIDES

Use the Guides menu to configure the Frame Guide, Action Guide, and Title Guide.

MODE

 Off: Disable all guides.

 Full: Guide has the same aspect ratio as the record format.

 4:3, 16:9, 1.85:1, 1.9:1, 2.4:1: Guide has the selected aspect ratio.

 User: Select an aspect ratio from the drop-down menu that displays when you select this option.

 Absolute: Guide is defined by absolute pixel dimensions rather than aspect ratio and scale. When you select

Absolute, the Width/Height fields replace the Scale field.

SCALE

Percentage to scale guide from its maximum possible size. Available range is 0–100%.

Display Mode: Lens

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 80

WIDTH/HEIGHT

The Width/Height fields replace the Scale field when you select Absolute from the Mode drop-down menu.

Select the values for the width and height of the guide in pixels.

OFFSET X/Y

Percentage to offset guide from its default centered position. Available range is 0–100%.

 100%: Right-aligned (for X offset) and bottom-aligned (for Y offset).

 -100%: Left-aligned (for X offset) and top-aligned (for Y offset).

APPEARANCE

 Line Style: Select one of the following line styles: Solid, Dashed, or Bracket.

 Color: Select the color that has the highest contrast to the scene. The default is White.

 Opacity: Set the guide opacity. Available options are 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%.

RELATIVE TO FRAME GUIDE

Select the Relative to Frame Guide check box to size and position the guide relative to (and have it bounded by)

the Frame Guide instead of the record format.

NOTE: The Relative to Frame Guide check box is available on the Action Guide and Title Guide tabs.

GENERAL TAB

Enable/Disable and select the location (Relative To), color, and opacity of the following elements:

 Center: The center crosshair.

 Grid: Rule-of-thirds grid.

 Shading: The shaded region outside of the area of interest.

TEST SIGNAL

Use the Test Signal menu to replace the video monitor outputs with one of the following video test patterns:

 Chip Chart

 SMPTE Bars

 Luma

To enable a test signal, select the test signal box. To exit, tap the touchscreen or press the Enter or Menu button

on the DSMC Side Handle or REDMOTE.

If needed, enable an Audio Tone.

NOTE: Test signals are not recordable; they are provided to help align external HD-SDI and HDMI monitors.

REDCAST

The REDCAST menu is only accessible when a REDCAST Module is installed. For more information, see the

REDCAST Module Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

LOOK

The Look menu includes: Color, Gain, ISO/FLUT, Sharpness, Curves, Color/Gamma, Color Temperature, and

LGG (Lift, Gamma, Gain).

The Look settings affect the look of the monitor path, but do not affect the recorded RAW data.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

COLOR

 Saturation: Adjusts color saturation. Range is 0.0 (monochrome) to 4.0 (super color). Default is 1.0.

 Contrast: Adjusts the overall contrast of the image. Range is –1.0 (flat) to 1.0 (max contrast). Default is 0.0.

 Brightness: Adjusts brightness without crushing highlights. Available range is –10.0 to 10.0. Default is 0.0.

 Exp Comp: Adjusts exposure compensation. Available range is –7.0 to 7.0. Default is 0.0.

GAIN

Adjust the Red channel, Blue channel, and Green channel individually. The range for each is 0.0 (none of the

color) to 10.0, and the default for each is 1.0.

ISO/FLUT

Use the ISO/FLUT menu to adjust ISO, FLUT, and Shadow. For more information, see the following articles:

 Exposure with RED Cameras: Strategy, available at www.red.com/learn/red-101/exposure-with-red-

cameras

 ISO Speed Revisited, available at www.red.com/learn/red-101/iso-speed-revisited

ISO

Select the camera ISO rating. The sensitivity value increments in 1/3 stops. When the ISO rating is adjusted,

the camera logs the change as metadata and the monitor path reacts accordingly. Higher ISO values lead to

brighter images in the monitor path, and vice versa.

RED recommends setting the ISO to the default, then adjust the aperture, lighting, and ND filters to match. The

ISO can later be adjusted around one (1) stop for fine-tuning.

Range is ISO 250 to 12,800. Default is ISO 800.

NOTE: For MONOCHROME and RED DRAGON MONOCHROME, the default is ISO 2000.

FLUT

Floating Point Lookup Table (FLUT) is an exposure control exclusive to RED. FLUT works like a traditional

ISO setting, but can be fine-tuned in post-production to any level of exposure precision. FLUT automatically

protects highlights and shadows, even when changed substantially.

The FLUT setting is expressed in terms of relative exposure value (EV), where each unit represents a 1-stop

change in midtone exposure level. Range is –8.0 to 8.0. Default is 0.0.

SHADOW

Shadow adjusts the toe value of the FLUT (the tone near black). Increasing the Shadow value raises the video

level of near blacks. Lowering the Shadow value crushes the video level of near blacks. Range is –2.0 to 2.0.

Default is 0.0.

SHARPNESS

Control the sharpness of each monitor output. Move to the left for a sharper image; move to the right for a less

sharp image.

CURVES

Define the individual curves for the Luma, Red, Green, and Blue channels. You can only adjust one (1) curve at

a time. Select Reset Curve to reset a curve.

NOTE: Luma is the only channel on BRAINs with MONOCHROME or RED DRAGON MONOCHROME sensors.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 82

COLOR/GAMMA

Adjust the monitor output Color Space and Graded Gamma curves. These settings affect metadata only, and

can be changed in REDCINE-X PRO.

COLOR SPACE AND GRADED GAMMA SPACE

RED recommends using the most recently released Color Space and Graded Gamma settings. Use legacy

settings (such as REDcolor2) only if you need to record footage to match footage that you recorded with that

legacy setting.

For more information, see the Understanding REDlogFilm and REDgamma article, available at www.red.com/

learn/red-101/redlogfilm-redgamma.

INDEPENDENT DISPLAY LUT

NOTE: Independent Display LUT is disabled when a REDCAST Module is attached.

NOTE: When Independent Display LUT is enabled, the menu may change from light gray to dark gray. The

camera applies the color and gamma spaces after rendering the user interface, so changing these settings

affects the user interface.

Independent Display LUT allows you to apply a different gamma space to each monitor (this feature does not

apply a LUT). You can record via HD-SDI or HDMI, apply a LUT through a LUT box, and then view a different

look on each monitor.

USE THE INDEPENDENT DISPLAY LUT FEATURE

To set up the Independent Display LUT feature, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Look > Color/Gamma.

2. Select the Independent Display LUT check box.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

3. If you plan on outputting ACES, select the ACES Proxy check box.

The camera calculates the neutral gamma space based on if the ACES Proxy check box is selected.

‒ ACES Proxy deselected: Neutral Gamma Space is REDLogFilm.

‒ ACES Proxy selected: Neutral Gamma Space is ACES (ACES Proxy). For more information, go to “ACES

Proxy” on page 84.

4. Select the Monitor Control button at the bottom of the menu.

The Monitor Control menu opens.

5. Select the monitor to configure from the drop-down menu at the top of the menu.

6. Select the curve that you want to apply to the output for the selected monitor from the Curve drop-down

menu:

‒ Neutral: The Neutral Gamma Space displayed on the Color/Gamma menu is applied to the output.

‒ Graded: The Graded Gamma Space selected on the Color/Gamma menu is applied to the output.

7. Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 for each monitor you are using.

8. To return to the Color/Gamma menu, select Close. To close all menus, tap any area outside of the menu.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 84

ACES PROXY

Select the ACES Proxy check box to generate an ACES-compliant solution. When this option is enabled, all

monitors output an ACES proxy that corresponds to ACESproxy10 (10-bit encoding). The firmware adjusts the

proxy output for each camera and sensor type to ensure that the raw image data is properly transformed into

the ACES color space.

You can record via HD-SDI or HDMI, apply a LUT through a LUT box, and then view the footage in real-time

on an external third-party monitor. Use a LUT that incorporates the Reference Rendering Transform (RRT) and

Output Device Transform (ODT) to create the look you want to achieve for your display.

Enabling the ACES Proxy option does not change the footage recorded to the SSD, but does add an ACES

metadata tag to the R3D file. The R3D has the most recently-selected color space and graded gamma space

(you cannot select color space and graded gamma space when ACES Proxy is enabled).

COLOR TEMPERATURE

Select a color temperature. The range is 1700 to 10,000 KELVIN, and the default is 5600 KELVIN.

NOTE: The Color Temperature settings are not accessible on BRAINs with MONOCHROME or RED DRAGON

MONOCHROME sensors.

TINT

Color temperature calculations assume a pure light source that may not be true in the specific scene the

camera is imaging. To compensate for any residual colorcast, the Tint parameter adjusts the RGB color balance

with a compensating magenta-green color component. Tint range is –100 to 100, with a default of 0.000.

NOTE: Selecting Auto White Balance calculates a new Tint value. The value does not change if you adjust the

color temperature manually. Selecting a preset resets Tint to 0.000.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

PRESETS

Each preset has 0.000 Tint. Available preset options are:

 Incandescent: 2800 K

 Tungsten: 3200 K

 Fluorescent: 4500 K

 Flash: 5500 K

 Daylight: 5600 K

 Cloudy: 7500 K

 Shade: 9000 K

AUTO WHITE BALANCE

Auto white balance analyzes the central 25% of the image visible in the monitor to calculate a color temperature

that will render a white object as white.

To use auto white balance, follow the instructions below:

1. Place a white or gray object under the ambient light.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Look > Color Temp.

Alternatively, select Color Temperature > Advanced... from the Upper Status Row.

3. Select Auto White Balance.

LGG (LIFT, GAMMA, GAIN)

Adjust the lift, gamma, and gain for the Red channel, Blue channel, and Green channel individually.

PROJECT

The Project menu includes: Frame Rate, Exposure, Timecode, Slate, and Format.

FRAME RATE

RECORDING FRAME RATE

Select the recording frame rate (also referred to as the capture frame rate). The recording frame rate is the

number of frames per second (FPS) that are recorded. The recording frame rate is different from the project

time base, which is the rate at which the footage will be played back.

The default recording frame rate is 23.98 FPS. If you change the project time base, the recording frame rate

automatically changes its value to match the project time base.

PROJECT TIME BASE

Select the project time base, which is the rate at which the footage will be played back. The project time base

displays in the lower left corner of the display.

The following project time bases are available:

 23.98 FPS (Default)

 24.00 FPS

 25.00 FPS

 29.97 FPS

 47.95 FPS

 48.00 FPS

 50.00 FPS

 59.94 FPS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 86

VARISPEED

When a recording frame rate other than the current project time base is selected, the FPS text turns yellow and

the word Varispeed replaces the Audio Meter in the lower right corner of the display.

Audio is not recorded in Varispeed mode.

EPIC DRAGON FRAME RATES

The table below describes the maximum frame rate for each resolution of the EPIC DRAGON.

The minimum frame rate is always 1 FPS.

The table below omits rows for the anamorphic formats, since the maximum frame rate for each anamorphic

format and the corresponding non-anamorphic format is the same.

NOTE: Frame rates below are based on a 23.98 time base, 8:1 compression, and Lookaround disabled.

FORMAT MAX FRAME RATE (FPS) FORMAT MAX FRAME RATE (FPS)

6K FF 82.81 3.5K FF 138.94

6K 2:1 85.05 3.5K 2:1 145.39

6K WS 100.67 3.5K WS 172.00

6K HD 83.33 3.5K HD 134.13

6K 6:5 82.81 3.5K 3:2 116.54

6K 3:2 82.81 3.5K 4:3 103.69

6K 4:1 168.91 3.5K 5:4 97.25

6K 8:1 333.11 3.5K 4:1 287.92

5.5K FF 88.49 3.5K 8:1 400.00

5.5K 2:1 92.60 3K FF 160.27

5.5K WS 109.56 3K 2:1 168.91

5.5K HD 86.28 3K WS 200.27

5.5K 4:1 183.51 3K HD 160.27

5.5K 8:1 360.49 3K 6:5 160.27

5K FF 96.39 3K 3:2 135.51

5K 2:1 101.45 3K 4:3 120.60

5K WS 120.38 3K 5:4 113.14

5K HD 96.39 3K 4:1 333.11

5K 6:5 96.39 3K 8:1 400.00

5K 4:1 200.27 2.5K FF 192.09

5K 8:1 390.44 2.5K 2:1 200.88

4.5K FF 113.33 2.5K WS 237.08

4.5K 2:1 113.33 2.5K HD 194.36

4.5K WS 134.13 2.5K 3:2 161.45

4.5K HD 109.92 2.5K 4:3 143.80

4.5K 3:2 90.81 2.5K 5:4 134.95

4.5K 4:1 224.92 2.5K 4:1 392.77

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

FORMAT MAX FRAME RATE (FPS) FORMAT MAX FRAME RATE (FPS)

4.5K 8:1 400.00 2.5K 8:1 400.00

4K FF 120.83 2K FF 240.55

4K 2:1 127.38 2K 2:1 252.55

4K WS 150.72 2K WS 301.10

4K HD 120.83 2K HD 240.55

4K 6:5 120.83 2K 6:5 240.55

4K 3:2 102.08 2K 3:2 202.74

4K 4:3 90.81 2K 4:3 180.49

4K 5:4 85.16 2K 5:4 169.34

4K 4:1 252.55 2K 4:1 400.00

4K 8:1 400.00 2K 8:1 400.00

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 88

SCARLET DRAGON FRAME RATES

The table below describes the maximum frame rate for each resolution of the SCARLET DRAGON.

The minimum frame rate is always 1 FPS.

NOTE: Frame rates below are based on a 23.98 time base, 8:1 compression, with Lookaround disabled.

FORMAT MAX FRAME RATE (FPS)

6K FF 12.08 (in Burst mode)

5K FF 24.62

5K 2:1 25.95

5K WS 30.71

5K HD 26.24

5K 6:5 38.63

4K FF 38.61

4K 2:1 40.87

4K WS 48.22

4K HD 41.16

4K 6:5 60.74

3K FF 67.86

3K 2:1 71.54

3K WS 84.67

3K HD 72.31

3K 6:5 81.22

2K FF 121.83

2K 2:1 128.49

2K WS 150

2K HD 121.83

2K 6:5 121.83

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

EPIC MYSTERIUM-X AND SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X FRAME RATES

The table below describes the maximum frame rate for each resolution of the EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET

MYSTERIUM-X.

The minimum frame rate is always 1 FPS.

The table below omits rows for the anamorphic formats, since the maximum frame rate for each anamorphic

format and the corresponding non-anamorphic format is the same.

NOTE: Frame rates below are based on a 23.98 time base, 8:1 compression, with Lookaround disabled.

FORMAT MAX FRAME RATE (FPS)

EPIC MYSTERIUM-X

MAX FRAME RATE (FPS)

SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X

5K FF 95.83 12

5K 2:1 100.83 12

5K WS 120.83 12

5K HD 95.83 12

5K 1.22:1 95.83 12

4K FF 120.83 30

4K WS 152.47 36

4K HD 120.83 30

3K FF 159.88 48

3K WS 200.88 60

3K HD 159.88 48

2K FF 239.67 60

2K WS 301.79 75

2K HD 239.67 60

1K HD 356.58 90

1K WS 400 120

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 90

EXPOSURE

Select the exposure (shutter speed) of each frame. You can change exposure while recording.

Decreasing shutter speed increases the amount of time that light hits the sensor, which increases exposure and

motion blur of moving objects. Increasing shutter speed decreases the amount of time that light hits the sensor,

which decreases exposure and motion blur of moving objects.

The Upper Status Row displays the exposure as either shutter speed or shutter angle. For more information,

go to “Exposure” on page 70.

If the camera is able to achieve the target exposure, the exposure value displays in white. If the camera is

unable to achieve the target exposure, the exposure value displays in yellow, and the camera uses the closest

available exposure.

NOTE: If using speed ramp mode, select an exposure that is valid for each ramp target frame rate. If the camera

ramps to a frame rate that is incompatible with the current exposure, the exposure changes to the longest

exposure possible for the frame rate. For more information, go to “Speed Ramp Mode” on page 100.

NOTE: You cannot change the exposure when HDR is enabled.

INTEGRATION TIME

Enter the exposure value as a shutter speed (1/xx sec).

 MYSTERIUM-X: Slowest speed is 1/recording frame rate. For 24 FPS, the slowest speed is 1/24 sec.

 RED DRAGON: Slowest speed is 1/8 sec, regardless of the recording frame rate.

The fastest speed is 1/131,579 sec. Default is 1/48 sec.

SHUTTER ANGLE

Enter the exposure value as a shutter angle (xx°). Range is 1.000–360.000°. Default is 180.000°.

EXPOSURE CONVERSIONS

The table below lists common shutter speed and shutter angle equivalents.

SHUTTER SPEED (1/XX SEC) SHUTTER ANGLE (°) SHUTTER SPEED (1/XX SEC) SHUTTER ANGLE (°)

1/32 270 1/120 72

1/48 180 1/192 45

1/50 172.8 1/348 22.5

1/60 144 1/696 11

1/96 90 1/1000 8.6

CONVERT SHUTTER SPEED TO SHUTTER ANGLE

Shutter Angle = (Shutter Speed x Frame Rate x 360)

Example: (1/48 x 24 x 360) = 180

CONVERT SHUTTER ANGLE TO SHUTTER SPEED

Shutter Speed = 1/(Frame Rate x 360/Angle)

Example: 1/(24 x 360/180) = 1/48

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

TIMECODE

For more information about timecode, go to “Timecode, Genlock, Multi-Camera Setup” on page 158.

TIMECODE SOURCE MODE DESCRIPTION

User Provided (Internal) Use Real Time Clock

(RTC)

Uses the internal Real Time Clock as the timecode counter

source. You can set the hours, minutes, and seconds in the

numerical boxes on the screen.

Set Manually Define a custom value as the timecode counter seed. Set

the hours, minutes, and seconds in the numerical boxes on

the screen.

External: BRAIN Varies by device Uses the timecode from an external device connected to

the timecode connector on the BRAIN.

External: Rear Module Varies by device Uses the timecode from an external device connected to a

Pro I/O Module or a REDCAST Module.

LTC OUT

The LTC Out (linear timecode out) check box is only available when a Pro I/O Module is attached. Select the

LTC Out check box to output the linear timecode signal generated by the camera through the timecode (TCODE)

port on the Pro I/O Module.

NOTE: If jamming camera timecode to a timecode device, ensure that LTC Out is disabled.

SLATE

Use the Slate menu to add metadata to clips. After configuring the following fields, the information populates

in the Media menu when formatting media:

 Cam ID

 Cam Pos

NOTE: The scene name is limited to eight (8) characters.

AUTO-INCREMENT TAKE

To automatically increment the take number when the camera stops recording, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Project > Slate > Scene.

2. Enter a value in the Take box.

AUTO SLATE

Frame values for Auto Head Frames and Auto Tail Frames on the Auto Slate tab, these values only show in-camera.

The Auto Head Frames and Auto Tail Frames metadata values are currently disabled in REDCINE-X PRO.

FORMAT

Use the Format menu to select the resolution, aspect ratio, anamorphic setting, and lookaround setting.

After selecting format settings, select Set Format.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 92

EPIC DRAGON FORMATS

The table below describes the formats that are available for EPIC DRAGON.

Default for EPIC DRAGON is 6K 2:1.

The table below omits rows for the anamorphic formats, since the pixel dimensions for each anamorphic format

and the corresponding non-anamorphic format are the same. For more information, go to “Anamorphic” on

page 97.

EPIC DRAGON offers a 6:5 aspect ratio for each resolution. Using a 6:5 aspect ratio at 2x anamorphic gives

you a 2:40:1 aspect ratio.

RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (PIXELS)

WIDTH HEIGHT

6K FF 6K RAW Full Frame 6144 3160

6K 2:1 6K RAW 2:1 6144 3072

6K WS 6K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 6144 2592

6K HD 6K RAW HD—16:9 5568 3132

6K 3:2 6K RAW 3:2 4752 3160

6K 6:5 6K RAW 6:5 3792 3160

6K 4:1 6K RAW 4:1 6144 1536

6K 8:1 6K RAW 8:1 6144 768

5.5K FF 5.5K RAW 5632 2948

5.5K 2:1 5.5K RAW 2:1 5632 2816

5.5K WS 5.5K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 5632 2376

5.5K HD 5.5K RAW HD—16:9 5376 3024

5.5K 4:1 5.5K RAW 4:1 5632 1408

5.5K 8:1 5.5K RAW 8:1 5632 704

5K FF 5K RAW Full Frame 5120 2700

5K 2:1 5K RAW 2:1 5120 2560

5K WS 5K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 5120 2160

5K HD 5K RAW HD—16:9 4800 2700

5K 6:5 5K RAW 6:5 3240 2700

5K 4:1 5K RAW 4:1 5120 1280

5K 8:1 5K RAW 8:1 5120 640

4.5K FF 4.5K RAW 4608 2412

4.5K 2:1 4.5K RAW 2:1 4608 2304

4.5K WS 4.5K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 4608 1944

4.5K HD 4.5K RAW HD—16:9 4224 2376

4.5K 3:2 4.5K RAW 3:2 4320 2880

4.5K 4:1 4.5K RAW 4:1 4608 1152

4.5K 8:1 4.5K RAW 8:1 4608 576

4K FF 4K RAW Full Frame 4096 2160

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (PIXELS)

WIDTH HEIGHT

4K 2:1 4K RAW 2:1 4096 2048

4K WS 4K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 4096 1728

4K HD 4K RAW HD—16:9 3840 2160

4K 6:5 4K RAW 6:5 2592 2160

4K 3:2 4K RAW 3:2 3840 2560

4K 4:3 4K RAW 4:3 3840 2880

4K 5:4 4K RAW 5:4 3840 3072

4K 4:1 4K RAW 4:1 4096 1024

4K 8:1 4K RAW 8:1 4096 512

3.5K FF 3.5K RAW Full Frame 3584 1876

3.5K 2:1 3.5K RAW 2:1 3584 1792

3.5K WS 3.5K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 3584 1512

3.5K HD 3.5K RAW HD—16:9 3456 1944

3.5K 3:2 3.5K RAW 3:2 3360 2240

3.5K 4:3 3.5K RAW 4:3 3360 2520

3.5K 5:4 3.5K RAW 5:4 3360 2688

3.5K 4:1 3.5K RAW 4:1 3584 896

3.5K 8:1 3.5K RAW 8:1 3584 448

3K FF 3K RAW Full Frame 3072 1620

3K 2:1 3K RAW 2:1 3072 1536

3K WS 3K Wide Screen—2.4:1 3072 1296

3K HD 3K RAW HD—16:9 2880 1620

3K 6:5 3K RAW 6:5 1944 1620

3K 3:2 3K RAW 3:2 2880 1920

3K 4:3 3K RAW 4:3 2880 2160

3K 5:4 3K RAW 5:4 2880 2304

3K 4:1 3K RAW 4:1 3072 768

3K 8:1 3K RAW 8:1 3072 384

2.5K FF 2.5K RAW Full Frame 2560 1340

2.5K 2:1 2.5K RAW 2:1 2560 1280

2.5K WS 2.5K Wide Screen—2.4:1 2560 1080

2.5K HD 2.5K RAW HD—16:9 2304 1296

2.5K 3:2 2.5K RAW 3:2 2400 1600

2.5K 4:3 2.5K RAW 4:3 2400 1800

2.5K 5:4 2.5K RAW 5:4 2400 1920

2.5K 4:1 2.5K RAW 4:1 2560 640

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 94

RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (PIXELS)

WIDTH HEIGHT

2.5K 8:1 2.5K RAW 8:1 2560 320

2K FF 2K RAW Full Frame 2048 1080

2K 2:1 2K RAW 2:1 2048 1024

2K WS 2K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 2048 864

2K HD 2K RAW HD—16:9 1920 1080

2K 3:2 2K RAW 3:2 1920 1280

2K 4:3 2K RAW 4:3 1920 1440

2K 5:4 2K RAW 5:4 1920 1536

2K 6:5 2K RAW 6:5 1296 1080

2K 4:1 2K RAW 4:1 2048 512

2K 8:1 2K RAW 8:1 2048 256

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SCARLET DRAGON FORMATS

The table below describes the formats that are available for SCARLET DRAGON.

SCARLET DRAGON offers a 6:5 aspect ratio for each resolution. Using a 6:5 aspect ratio at 2x anamorphic

gives you a 2:40:1 aspect ratio.

RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (PIXELS)

WIDTH HEIGHT

6K 6K RAW Full Frame 6144 3160

6K 3:2 6K RAW 3:2 4752 3160

6K 6:5 6K RAW 6:5 3792 3160

5K 5K RAW Full Frame 5120 2700

5K 2:1 5K RAW 2:1 5120 2560

5K WS 5K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 5120 2160

5K HD 5K RAW HD—16:9 4800 2700

5K 6:5 5K RAW 6:5 3240 2700

4K 4K RAW Full Frame 4096 2160

4K 2:1 4K RAW 2:1 4096 2048

4K WS 4K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 4096 1728

4K HD 4K RAW HD—16:9 3840 2160

4K 6:5 4K RAW 6:5 2592 2160

3K 3K RAW Full Frame 3072 1620

3K 2:1 3K RAW 2:1 3072 1536

3K WS 3K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 3072 1296

3K HD 3K RAW HD—16:9 2880 1620

3K 6:5 3K RAW 6:5 1944 1620

2K 2K RAW Full Frame 2048 1080

2K 2:1 2K RAW 2:1 2048 1024

2K WS 2K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 2048 864

2K HD 2K RAW HD—16:9 1920 1080

2K 6:5 2K RAW 6:5 1296 1080

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 96

EPIC MYSTERIUM-X AND SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X FORMATS

The table below describes the formats that are available for EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X.

 EPIC MYSTERIUM-X: Default is 5K 2:1.

 SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X: Default is 4K.

The table below omits rows for the anamorphic formats, since the pixel dimensions for each anamorphic format

and the corresponding non-anamorphic format are the same. For more information, go to “Anamorphic” on

page 97.

RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (PIXELS) DIMENSIONS (MM)

WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH HEIGHT DIAGONAL

5K FF 5K RAW Full Frame 5120 2700 27.65 14.58 31.26

5K 2:1 5K RAW 2:1 5120 2560 27.65 13.82 30.91

5K WS 5K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 5120 2160 27.65 11.66 30.01

5K HD 5K RAW HD—16:9 4800 2700 25.92 14.58 29.74

5K 1.22:1 5K RAW 1.22:1 3300 2700 17.80 14.58 23.01

4K FF 4K RAW Full Frame 4096 2160 22.12 11.66 25.01

4K WS 4K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 4096 1708 22.12 9.22 23.96

4K HD 4K RAW HD—16:9 3840 2160 20.74 11.66 23.79

3K FF 3K RAW Full Frame 3072 1620 16.59 8.75 18.75

3K WS 3K Wide Screen—2.4:1 3072 1284 16.59 6.93 17.98

3K HD 3K RAW HD—16:9 2880 1620 15.55 8.75 17.84

2K FF 2K RAW Full Frame 2048 1080 11.06 5.83 12.50

2K WS 2K RAW Wide Screen—2.4:1 2048 854 11.06 4.61 11.98

2K HD 2K RAW HD—16:9 1920 1080 10.37 5.83 11.90

1K HD 1K RAW HD—16:9 1280 720 6.91 3.89 7.93

1K WS 1K Wide Screen—2.4:1 1280 480 6.91 2.59 7.38

RESOLUTION

Select the Resolution.

 For a list of EPIC DRAGON resolutions, go to “EPIC DRAGON Formats” on page 92.

 For a list of SCARLET DRAGON resolutions, go to “SCARLET DRAGON Formats” on page 95.

 For a list of EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X resolutions, go to “EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and

SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X Formats” on page 96.

ASPECT RATIO

Select the Aspect Ratio. The available aspect ratios are determined by the selected resolution.

 For a list of aspect ratios for EPIC DRAGON, go to “EPIC DRAGON Formats” on page 92.

 For a list of aspect ratios for SCARLET DRAGON, go to “SCARLET DRAGON Formats” on page 95.

 For a list of aspect ratios for EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X, go to “EPIC MYSTERIUM-X

and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X Formats” on page 96.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

ANAMORPHIC

Select an Anamorphic setting, if applicable. The anamorphic setting de-squeezes the image on the monitor

and marks the footage as anamorphic in the clip metadata. When you open the clip in REDCINE-X PRO, the

program automatically de-squeezes the image. The available anamorphic settings depend on your camera type.

 EPIC DRAGON: Supports anamorphic 1.3x and 2x with each format.

 SCARLET DRAGON: Supports anamorphic 2x for 5K 6:5.

 EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X: Supports the following:

‒ 5K FF: Anamorphic 1.3x and 2x

‒ 5K 1.22:1: Anamorphic 2x

NOTE: Anamorphic de-squeeze on the RED PRO LCD 7.0" requires that your DSMC is on firmware v5.3 or later.

DE-SQUEEZED RESOLUTION AND DE-SQUEEZED ASPECT RATIO

When you enable anamorphic, both the actual format and the de-squeezed format display at the bottom of the

Format menu.

When anamorphic is enabled, the camera does not crop the sensor image, so the recorded image has the same

resolution and dimensions as the corresponding non-anamorphic format.

After de-squeezing the footage in post production, the resulting footage has a different format than the original

recorded image. The format of the de-squeezed footage is the second format (resolution and aspect ratio) that

displays on the Format menu.

Since the camera does not crop the image, you will have additional horizontal area to frame the image. Then,

crop or scale the footage to the intended aspect ratio.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 98

SHORT-CUT TO INDUSTRY-STANDARD ANAMORPHIC FORMATS

To quickly access industry-standard anamorphic formats, go to Menu > Settings > Project > Format > Anamorphic.

The Anamorphic tab is a short-cut to all of the industry-standard anamorphic formats, so that you can easily

select the most common anamorphic formats.

The Anamorphic tab lists the following anamorphic formats:

 EPIC DRAGON: Every format with a 6:5, 5:4, or 4:3 aspect ratio and a 1.3x or 2x anamorphic setting

 SCARLET DRAGON: 5K 6:5 2x

 EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X: 5K 1.22:1 2x

NOTE: The Anamorphic tab only lists industry-standard anamorphic formats. To access all of the anamorphic

and non-anamorphic formats, go to Menu > Settings > Project > Format > Format.

LOOKAROUND

When Lookaround is enabled, the Frame Guide and recording area are scaled down on the display so that you

can see what images will enter the recording area.

To assign a Shading overlay to the Lookaround area (the area outside of the recording area), go to “General

Tab” on page 80.

Lookaround limits the available frame rates. Also, Lookaround is either very limited or not possible for high

resolutions (such as 5K Full Frame in EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and 6K Full Frame in EPIC DRAGON). At high

resolutions, the recording area on the display shows the full sensor area or full sensor height, so there is no

extra room for Lookaround.

UHD

The UHD menu is only accessible when a REDCAST Module is installed. For more information, see the REDCAST

MODULE Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

AUDIO

The Audio menu lets you configure the audio subsystem. For more information, go to “Record and Monitor

Audio” on page 141.

RECORDING

The Recording menu includes: Mode, Frame Processing, Pre-Record, and Indicator.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

MODE

You can select the following recording modes: Continuous Record, Internal Timelapse Timer, Frame Trigger,

REDCODE Burst, Speed Ramp Mode, Multi-Shot, and Motion + Stills.

STORAGE

You can select the following storage locations:

 Local: Stores footage directly to an SSD

 Network: Stores footage to a network

NOTE: The Network option is only available on an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON.

 External: Stores footage to an external device

NOTE: In External storage, you can only select Continuous Record and Motion + Stills recording modes.

CONTINUOUS RECORD

NOTE: This mode is not available in Stills mode.

Continuous Record is the “normal” recording mode. The camera continuously records frames at the current

recording frame rate. You can limit each recording to a specific amount of frames using the Limit Recording to

setting.

INTERNAL TIMELAPSE TIMER

NOTE: This mode is not available in Stills mode.

In Internal Timelapse Timer mode, the camera records a specified number of frames at a specified interval. The

current recording frame rate determines the timing of the frames per pulse.

For example, in Internal Timelapse Timer mode, you can choose to record a total amount of 1000 frames, and

take 1 frame every 4.67 seconds. After recording 1000 frames (which takes 4,670.00 seconds), the recording

process stops.

To use Internal Timelapse Timer mode, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Recording > Mode.

2. Select Internal Timelapse Timer from the Mode drop-down menu.

3. Use the Limit Recording to fields to set the recording to end at a predefined frame limit (optional).

4. Select the number of frames to be captured in the Record field.

5. Select the time interval from the Interval field (range is 1–3,599 sec). The Interval setting specifies the

frequency at which the frame or group of frames is captured.

6. Close the menu.

7. Start recording to start the interval.

The overlay displays the number of frames recorded out of the total amount of frames.

FRAME TRIGGER

NOTE: This mode is not available in Stills mode.

In Frame Trigger mode, the camera records the specified number of frames for each external trigger. This mode

limits the REDCODE based on sustainable record rates.

To use Frame Trigger mode, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Recording > Mode.

2. Select Frame Trigger from the Mode drop-down menu.

3. Use the Limit Recording to fields to set the recording to end at a predefined frame limit (optional).

4. Select a Pre Count and Post Count. For more information, go to “Pre Count and Post Count” on page 101.

5. Close the menu.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 100

6. Start recording.

The overlay displays the number of frames recorded out of the total amount of frames.

NOTE: There may be a delay between receiving the external trigger and capturing the next frame(s). The delay

may be as long one (1) frame period at the current recording frame rate. To completely synchronize frames to

an external trigger, set Sensor Sync Mode to MoCo. For more information, go to “Sync” on page 107.

SPEED RAMP MODE

NOTE: This mode is not available in Stills mode.

Speed Ramp mode lets you program the current recording frame rate to transition to different recording frame

rates during recording.

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Recording > Mode.

2. Select Speed Ramp Mode from the Mode drop-down menu.

3. Use the Limit Recording to fields to set the recording to end at a predefined frame limit (optional).

4. Select a ramp target:

‒ Ramp A/B/C/D: Each ramp target is tied to a specific Target/Duration combination.

‒ Ramp Reset: Ramp to the starting frame rate with the specified Duration.

5. Set the Target frame rate.

6. Set the Duration, which is how long it takes to transition from the current frame rate to the target frame rate.

7. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Keys and program a key to start the speed ramp:

‒ Record: Start Speed Ramp A/B/C/D

‒ Record: Start Speed Ramp Reset

8. Start recording.

9. To start speed ramp, press the key that you have mapped to start the speed ramp.

The frame rate transitions to the target frame rate during the duration you set up.

NOTE: If using speed ramp mode, select an exposure that is valid for each ramp target frame rate. If the camera

ramps to a frame rate that is incompatible with the current exposure, the exposure changes to the longest

exposure possible for the frame rate.

REDCODE BURST

NOTE: This mode is not available in Stills mode.

In REDCODE Burst mode, the camera can record at a lower compression (REDCODE) for the specified amount

of frames.

When REDCODE Burst mode is enabled and recording starts, the camera captures a “burst” of frames at the

lower REDCODE, and then continues to record at the next available REDCODE. To add more bursts to clips

during recording, press any key mapped to “Record: Mark Frame”.

To use REDCODE Burst mode, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Recording > Mode.

2. Select REDCODE Burst from the Mode drop-down menu.

3. Use the Limit Recording to fields to set the recording to end at a predefined frame limit (optional).

4. Select a Pre Count and Post Count. For more information, go to “Pre Count and Post Count” on page 101

5. Close the menu.

6. Start recording.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

PRE COUNT AND POST COUNT

When Frame Trigger or Burst mode is enabled, select the number of frames for the Pre Count and Post Count:

 Pre Count: The camera captures the frame cache from the time preceding the marker.

 Post Count: The camera captures the remaining frame cache after the marker.

The maximum frame counts are listed in the Available column, and are based on format and REDCODE.

MULTI-SHOT

NOTE: Multi-Shot mode is only available on an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON.

NOTE: The camera does not sync timecode in Multi-Shot mode.

NOTE: This mode is available in Motion mode, but is only recommended in Stills mode.

Multi-Shot mode removes restrictions on Recording Frame Rate and REDCODE, allowing you to shoot at a high

resolution, high frame rate, and low compression. These restrictions are removed because the camera records

first to the camera’s memory, and then offloads (while recording) to SSD after the camera’s buffer fills up. Since

the camera records only as fast as the buffer can transfer data, frames are dropped from the clip.

Multi-Shot mode has two sub-modes:

 Basic Multi-Shot mode

 Advanced Multi-Shot mode

BASIC MULTI-SHOT MODE

In Basic Multi-Shot mode, you can record a one-frame clip by pressing a Record key, or you can continuously

record frames by holding a Record key. This mode is the easiest way to shoot stills, but there is some latency

(about 700 milliseconds) when you press Record.

This mode only involves Record keys on the side SSD modules, REDMOTE, and DSMC Side Handle. Pressing

the PWR/REC key on the BRAIN initiates Advanced Multi-Shot mode.

To use Basic Multi-Shot mode, perform one of the following:

 Press a Record key to record a one-frame clip.

 Press and hold a Record key to start a new clip and continuously add frames to that clip. Release the Record

key to stop adding frames and end the clip.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 102

ADVANCED MULTI-SHOT MODE

In this mode, the camera is continuously recording, but is not saving frames. This eliminates the delay you get

in Basic Multi-Shot mode. Since the camera is continuously recording, the camera requires the same amount

of power it does during Continuous Record (as opposed to Preview mode). Unlike Basic mode, all frames are

added to one (1) clip, instead of to separate clips.

To use Advanced Multi-Shot mode, follow the instructions below:

1. Press the PWR/REC key on the BRAIN to start a new clip. This initial press adds one (1) frame to the clip.

2. Press a Record key on the side SSD module, REDMOTE, or DSMC Side Handle to add frames to the clip:

‒ Press a Record key once to add a few frames to the clip. (The number of frames varies, and depends

on the buffer.)

‒ Press and hold a Record key to continuously add frames; release the Record key to stop adding frames.

3. Press the PWR/REC key on the BRAIN to end the clip.

NOTE: You cannot shut down the camera until you end the clip.

ENABLE MULTI-SHOT MODE

To enable Multi-Shot mode, follow the instructions below:

1. Set the camera to Stills mode.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Recording > Mode.

3. Select Multi-Shot from the Mode drop-down menu.

4. Use the Limit Recording to fields to set the recording to end at a predefined frame limit (optional).

5. Close the menu.

6. For more information on using the different sub-modes, go to:

‒ “Basic Multi-Shot Mode” on page 101

‒ “Advanced Multi-Shot Mode” on page 102

MOTION + STILLS

NOTE: This mode is available in Motion mode, but is only recommended in Stills mode.

Motion + Stills mode is identical to Continuous Record, except that when you initiate recording by pressing

the PWR/REC key on the BRAIN, all other Record keys mark frames for the duration of the clip. (If you initiate

recording by pressing any other Record key, you can press any key mapped to “Record: Mark Frame” to mark

stills.)

To use Motion + Stills mode, follow the instructions below:

1. Set the camera to Stills mode.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Recording > Mode.

3. Select Motion + Stills from the Mode drop-down menu.

4. Use the Limit Recording to fields to set the recording to end at a predefined frame limit (optional).

5. Close the menu.

6. Press the PWR/REC key on the BRAIN to start recording.

7. Press a Record key on the side SSD module, REDMOTE, or DSMC Side Handle to mark a frame.

8. Press the PWR/REC key on the BRAIN to stop recording.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

FRAME PROCESSING

NOTE: Frame processing is not supported in Speed Ramp Mode. For more information, go to “Speed Ramp

Mode” on page 100.

Frame processing allows for the combination of multiple captured frames into one recorded frame. The

combination occurs before the resulting frame is encoded. You can select the following frame processing

settings: No Frame Processing, Frame Summing, Frame Averaging.

When in Frame Summing mode or Frame Averaging mode, the current integration time is applied to each frame.

This means if the integration time is not the entire frame time (or 360°) there are gaps between the images used

to create the combined frame. This may lead to unexpected motion artifacts.

The effect of frame processing is only visible during record. In Frame Summing mode, this means the exposure

changes between preview and record. Experiment with the exposure and frame processing settings to achieve

the effect you want.

NO FRAME PROCESSING

Normal frame processing mode. The Frames to Process selection does not affect recording.

FRAME SUMMING

Frame Summing combines the specified number of frames into one frame, and adds together the exposure time

for each of the original frames. The resulting frame has an effective integration time that is equal to the current

integration time multiplied by the number of frames.

For example, if you select 16 as the Frames to Process value, and set exposure to 1/48 sec, the resulting image

has an effective integration time of 1/3 sec (16 x 1/48).

Frame summing results in a final image that is brighter and possibly blurrier than any of the original frames, so

you can use frame summing to achieve the effect of long-exposure.

FRAME AVERAGING

Frame Averaging combines the specified number of frames into one frame, and averages the exposure time

for each of the original frames. The resulting frame has an effective integration time that is equal to the current

integration time.

For example, if you select 16 as the Frames to Process value, and set exposure to 1/48 sec, the resulting image

still has the exposure value of 1/48 sec, along with the effect of long-exposure.

You can use frame averaging to achieve the effect of long-exposure along with the benefits of reduced noise.

However, frame averaging does affect motion blur characteristics.

PRE-RECORD

When enabled, the Pre-Record setting continuously captures a cache of footage before recording starts. Select

to have 4–30 seconds (incremented at two second intervals) of pre-record time added to the actual footage.

When Pre-Record is enabled, you will not miss the start of a shot by being a little slow on the trigger.

 Pre-Record Duration: Select the pre-record time.

 Always trigger Pre-Record before recording: When selected, Pre-Record always starts when recording starts:

A. Press PWR/REC to activate Pre-Record.

B. Press PWR/REC a second time to start recording.

C. Press PWR/REC a third time to stop recording.

 Trigger Pre-Record Now: When selected, the Pre-Record menu closes and Pre-Record mode starts.

NOTE: Always perform a Secure Format before using Pre-Record. A Secure Format restores the SSD back to

factory out-of-box settings, and optimizes the SSD for Pre-Record.

NOTE: To use Pre-Record only for specific situations, map Pre-Record to a key (Menu > Settings > Setup > Keys

> Record: Start Pre-Record). For more information, go to “Keys” on page 104.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 104

INDICATOR

 Enable Sounds: Select this check box to enable sounds. Then select sounds for the following actions:

‒ Record Start

‒ Record Stop

‒ Mark Still Frame

 EVF Tally Light: Select this check box to enable the EVF Record Tally LED on the EVF to illuminate red when

recording.

SETUP

The Setup menu includes: Keys, Date/Time, Communication, REDmote, GPIO/Sync, Fan Control, Lens, and

Motor Control.

KEYS

Map keys to often-used actions to easily control the camera. For a full list of the default key mappings, go to

“Default Key Functions” on page 219.

KEY MAPPING

To map or remap a user key:

1. Press the user key that you want to map.

2. Select an action from the Press (or CCW) drop-down menu that you want to map to the user key.

3. To un-map a key, select -Key Disabled- from the drop-down menu.

4. If you want, map a Release or (CW) action to the key.

A Release action occurs when a pressed key is released.

OPTIONS

 MENU key returns to settings menu: Pressing the Menu key on a side module or REDMOTE moves you up one

level in the menu tree.

 Lock Side Module keys: None of the module keys perform any actions when pressed, unless you set up the

exceptions below:

‒ Record key remains active when locked

‒ Navigation keys remain active when locked

 Show key action notifications: A notification displays on the bottom of the display when you perform an

action mapped to a key.

SOFT KEYS

The following sets of soft keys are available on the touchscreen:

 A, B, C, D: Left side of the touchscreen

 1, 2, 3, 4: Right side of the touchscreen

To map or remap a soft key, select an action from the drop-down menu next to the key you want to map.

 Enable Soft Keys on touchscreen: Tap the left or right side of the touchscreen to show the soft keys.

 Show key actions as labels: When the soft keys display, the number/letter of the key and the key action

display.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

ADVANCED

Use the Advanced tab to map any key, even if the key is not currently accessible. For example, you can map

the REDMOTE keys even if a REDMOTE is not present.

WARNING: It is possible to remap the navigation keys using this tab. However, if you do not have a touchscreen

attached, it is possible to lock out control. Be careful when remapping navigation keys.

DATE/TIME

Use the Date/Time menu to reset the internal clock of the camera. The time and date are timestamps on R3D

files when recording to an SSD. The camera uses the 24-hour clock convention (military time). For example,

enter 2:35 p.m. as 14:35:00.

The date and time are saved when you close the Date/Time menu.

COMMUNICATION

Use the Communication menu to allow one (1) or more cameras to communicate with each other or external

devices.

You can use the serial port or a direct Ethernet cable to connect two (2) cameras, or one (1) camera and one

(1) external device. If the camera is connected via Ethernet to a hub or router, multiple cameras and devices

can communicate with each other.

For example, on a multi-rig 3D shoot, you can send commands to an individual camera (Example: Set CAM_A_L

to 1/48 exposure), to a group of cameras (Example: Set 3DRIG_A to 48 FPS), or to all cameras (Example: Start

Recording on all cameras).

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 106

CAMERA NAME

Use the Camera menu to set up a unique identifier for your camera (or a group of cameras). All command

filtering happens on the receiver side of the communication link. Use camera names and group names to

address commands to a specific camera or group of networked cameras.

 Camera ID: Enter a unique camera name to use in network communications. The field is limited to eight (8)

characters.

 Group ID: Enter a group name to identify the camera as a member of a group of devices. The field is limited

to eight (8) characters, and the default name is DEFAULT.

 Target: Specify which devices the camera can send commands to:

‒ All: The camera can send commands to all devices on the network.

‒ None: The camera can only receive commands. The camera cannot send commands.

‒ Custom: The camera can send commands to a specific camera/device (enter the name of the camera/

device in the Target ID text box) or a specific group (enter the name of the group in the Target ID text

box). The camera/group name must match the name entered in the Name/Group field of the target

device(s).

SERIAL PROTOCOL

The camera can communicate to external devices via the CTRL and the GIG-E connectors (camera-to-camera

communication is possible only via GIG-E or the REDLINK

Bridge).

Select one of the following protocols from the Serial Protocol drop-down menu:

 None (Default)

 Element Technica

 3ality SPC 7XXX

 REDLINK Command Protocol

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

ETHERNET

Use the settings on the Ethernet tab to configure the GIG-E port. Each camera or device requires a unique IP

address. For camera-to-camera communication via Ethernet, both cameras need to be in the same sub-net

(have the same netmask address) and have the same gateway address.

 Enable DHCP: Enables DHCP. If a DHCP-server is available in the communications network, the camera

obtains an IP address, netmask address, and gateway address automatically from the DHCP server. You

cannot manually enter anything in the IP Address, Netmask, and Gateway fields when this check box is

selected.

 Enable Camera to Camera: A change to settings on this camera is sent to other cameras via the network as

a SET command (as UDP packets). The SET command then sets the property on other cameras. If this

camera receives a SET command, the camera does not send the command to other cameras/devices.

 Enable External Control: This camera can be controlled via TCP/IP from an external device.

WIFI

The settings on the WiFi menu are only used when a REDLINK Bridge is attached to the DSMC. For more

information, see the REDLINK Bridge Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

RCP

Select the Enable Remote Control Panel (RCP) check box to enable a remote control panel (RCP).

COMPATIBLE REMOTE CONTROL PANELS (RCP)

The following remote control panels have been confirmed for compatibility with the DSMC:

 Sony

RCP-1500

 Sony RCP-1501

 Sony RCP-1530

 Sony MSU-1500

REDMOTE

Use the REDMOTE menu to pair a REDMOTE to the DSMC. For more information, go to “REDMOTE Operation”

on page 148.

 Wireless Enable: When selected, the DSMC produces a wireless signal. Disable wireless in any setting in

which the wireless signal could interfere with other devices, such as in a helicopter.

 Wireless Channel: Select the communication channel for the wireless connection in the event of interference

from other wireless devices.

GPIO/SYNC

SYNC

Use the Sync menu to set up genlock and Motion Control (MoCo). For more information, go to “Timecode,

Genlock, Multi-Camera Setup” on page 158.

SENSOR SYNC MODE

Sensor Sync Mode allows the shutter timing (scan start) to sync to an external signal.

 Off: Sensor runs at the current recording frame rate. This is the default option.

 Genlock: Sensor synchronizes with the incoming compatible genlock signal.

 MoCo: Each rising edge on the sync input triggers a frame to be captured.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 108

GENLOCK SOURCE

Select a genlock input:

 BRAIN (Default)

 Rear Module (Pro I/O Module or REDCAST Module)

BRAIN GPIO

 GPI Function (Camera Input): Select one (1) of the following options to configure the input for devices

connected to the SYNC connector on the BRAIN:

‒ Sync In: The camera input is used as a sync-in signal for MoCo.

‒ General Purpose In: Use the BRAIN GPI In High/Low drop-down menus to map inputs to actions.

 GPO Function (Camera Output): Select an options to configure the output for devices connected to the CTRL

connector on the BRAIN:

‒ Sync Out: Provides an output sync signal to act as a shutter start tally.

‒ Recording Indicator Out: Provides a signal when recording is in process.

For more information, go to “Input/Output Connectors” on page 201.

GEN AND SYNC STATUS INDICATORS

The Lower Status Row of the camera display has GEN and SYNC indicators, which change color based on the

current genlock and sync statuses. For more information, go to “System Status Indicators” on page 59.

FAN AND TEMPERATURE MANAGEMENT

The DSMC is controlled by complex thermal algorithms to ensure that the sensor and camera operate at safe

temperatures. Each fan control mode affects the sensor temperature, sensor warm-up time, fan speed, and

resulting fan noise.

When selecting a fan mode, first take into consideration how each fan mode behaves, and then select a fan

mode that fits the needs of your project.

Regardless of sensor type and fan mode, you will get the best image quality by performing a black shading

calibration at the temperature you want to use for your shoot.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

FAN CONTROL MODES

Select a fan control mode for the bottom fan. If a top fan is installed, it runs at a constant speed when necessary.

NOTE: After selecting a new fan setting, run the DSMC until the core temperature stabilizes, and then perform

a black shading calibration.

NOTE: If using a top fan, the top fan may not run immediately after turning on the DSMC, as the top fan runs

when the DSMC requires additional cooling power.

NOTE: Manual and Auto modes require that you actively manage the sensor temperature, because these modes

focus on controlling fan speed and do not target a narrow sensor temperature range. Use the T/E status

indicators as guides for proper temperature calibration.

NOTE: Maximum speeds are intended as target speeds only; actual fan speeds may be higher at times due to

long recording times or high ambient temperatures.

ADAPTIVE

Adaptive is the default mode for EPIC DRAGON and SCARLET DRAGON.

Select a target temperature and the bottom fan self-adjusts to maintain the selected temperature. The default

target temperature is 65°C. After the camera reaches the target temperature, and if the ambient temperature

remains constant, Adaptive mode results in a consistent fan speed and fan noise over time.

Targeting a higher temperature raises the sensor temperature, lengthens the sensor warm-up time, and lowers

the fan speed. Targeting a lower temperature lowers the sensor temperature, shortens the sensor warm-up

time, and increases the fan speed.

 EPIC DRAGON and SCARLET DRAGON: Target temperature range is 55°C to 70°C. A target temperature of 65°C

works best across most environmental conditions.

 EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X: Target temperature range is 45°C to 70°C. Target temperatures

above 50°C give noticeable fan noise improvements when compared to Auto mode.

ADAPTIVE PREVIEW QUIET RECORD

NOTE: Target Temperature only affects standby mode.

 Record mode: The camera uses Quiet fan mode. For more information, go to “Quiet” on page 109.

 Standby mode: The camera uses Adaptive fan mode. For more information, go to “Adaptive” on page 109.

AUTO

Auto is the default mode for EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X.

Select a maximum bottom fan record speed, and the standby mode fan speed self-adjusts accordingly so that

enough cooling is provided overall.

The default Maximum Record Speed is 50%. The Maximum Record Speed range is 25–100%. A slower speed

setting results in a faster standby mode fan speed, and vice versa.

QUIET

The bottom fan self-adjusts to maintain the lowest possible noise level in record and standby mode while still

cooling the DSMC. Using Quiet results in a higher sensor temperature when compared to Auto mode.

MANUAL

Select a speed for the bottom fan in both record and standby modes. The bottom fan self-adjusts to maintain

the selected speeds. The default Maximum Record Speed is 50% and the default Maximum Preview Speed is

75%. The range for both Maximum Record Speed and Maximum Preview Speed is 25–100%.

POST RECORD DELAY

Select the amount of time that it takes for the bottom fan to switch from record to preview mode.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 110

LENS

LENS TAB

The options displayed on the Lens tab change based on the attached lens mount.

PL MOUNT

 Enable Power to Lens: Ensures that the BRAIN powers the lens via the lens mount. This feature is enabled by

default, but the camera saves the last selected setting. Deselect when using a Fujinon

T2.9 Cabrio Premier

PL lens. If you disable this feature for the Fujinon Cabrio, re-enable it when using other lenses. For more

information, go to “Fujinon T2.9 Cabrio Premier PL Lenses” on page 213.

 Auto-Detect PL Lenses: By default, this feature is enabled.

 Detect Lens: Detects a lens, if one is attached.

CANON AND NIKON LENS SETTINGS

The options below display when a DSMC Nikon Mount or DSMC Canon Mount is installed with a supported

lens.

 Aperture: Enter the aperture value. The range and default depend on the lens.

 Focus: Enter the focal distance. The default value is the value from the lens. The range depends on the lens.

MOTION MOUNT TAB

The Motion Mount menu is only accessible when a DSMC RED MOTION MOUNTis installed. For more information,

see the RED MOTION MOUNT Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

MOTOR CONTROL

Use the Motor Control menu to set up the RED 3-Axis Lens Control System. For more information, see the RED

3-Axis Lens Control System Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

MAINTENANCE

The Maintenance menu includes: Save Log, Upgrade, Calibrate, Self Test, Restore System, Rediscover, System

Status, and OLPF.

SAVE A LOG FILE

A LOG file is a detailed text file of the processes and operations performed by the DSMC. If you contact RED

for support, you may be asked to send a LOG file.

To save a LOG file, follow the instructions below:

1. Ensure that a REDMAG 1.8" SSD or RED MINI-MAG SSD is properly mounted to the DSMC.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance.

3. Select Save Log.

The LOG file is saved as a *.txt file in the SSD root directory.

For more information about RED support or to create a support ticket, go to https://support.red.com.

NOTE: The DSMC automatically saves a LOG file when it is turned off properly and an SSD is mounted.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

UPGRADE

You can check for upgrades for the following items:

 Camera: Go to “Upgrade DSMC Firmware” on page 172.

 REDMOTE: Go to “Upgrade REDMOTE Firmware” on page 155.

 Media: For more information on the media upgrade procedure, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide,

available at www.red.com/downloads.

CALIBRATE

The Calibrate menu includes: Sensor, Gyro/Acc, and Lens.

SENSOR CALIBRATION

Sensor calibration, also known as black shading, is a process during which the camera optimizes image

quality by ensuring that pixel sensitivity remains consistent throughout the sensor. Black shading generates a

calibration map based on system and environment settings. After calibration, the sensor shows a uniform noise

profile over the whole area without any falloffs on any side.

For more information on sensor calibration, see the Black Shading Calibration article, available at www.red.

com/learn/red-101/black-shading-calibration.

NOTE: Calibration maps will still be available after performing a system restore.

CHECK NOISE PROFILE

To check the current noise profile, follow the instructions below:

1. Ensure that the camera reaches the temperature you want to use for your shoot.

2. Set the exposure to the exposure you want to use for your shoot.

3. Put a lens cap on the lens (if a lens is attached) or a front body cap on the BRAIN (if a lens is not attached).

4. Go to Menu > Settings > Look > FLUT.

5. Set FLUT to 8.000.

6. Check the noise that displays on the monitor:

‒ The noise is random, with no fixed patterns or lines. The sensor is calibrated.

‒ The noise has patterns or lines. Calibrate the sensor. For more information, go to “Calibration Capture

(Black Shading)” on page 112.

WHEN TO CALIBRATE SENSOR

Calibration is required:

 After an extreme change in temperature (+/– 30°F or +/–15°C) from the current calibration map.

 After an extreme change in exposure time (+/– 1/2 sec) from the current calibration map.

 If either the T or E in the CAL: T/E indicator is not green.

 If the noise profile shows patterns or lines. For more information, go to “Check Noise Profile” on page 111.

 For EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON: After each firmware upgrade.

 For EPIC MYSTERIUM-X or SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X: After a firmware upgrade if instructed to do so in the

firmware release notes.

To check the temperature/exposure of the current calibration file, go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > System

Status > Calibration.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 112

CALIBRATION CAPTURE (BLACK SHADING)

Not including preparation time, the calibration procedure takes several minutes. To perform black shading,

follow the instructions below:

1. Ensure that the camera reaches the temperature you want to use for your shoot.

2. Set the exposure to the exposure you want to use for your shoot.

3. Ensure that the sensor is as dark as possible.

‒ Preferably, take off the lens, and install the front body cap.

‒ If you cannot take off the lens, put a lens cap on the lens. (Not all lens caps completely block IR. Lens

caps are made to protect the lens, not necessarily to block light.)

‒ If possible, use a dark room.

‒ Just closing the aperture is NOT sufficient.

4. Ensure a properly formatted SSD is attached to the camera.

Even if you are not saving the calibration map to the DSMC, an SSD is required to store RAW images during

calibration.

5. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Calibrate > Sensor.

NOTE: If the calibration map name is “empty”, that means that the only calibration map on your camera is

the factory calibration.

6. For EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON, you can create up to four (4) calibration maps at a time. Select

a check box for each calibration map you want, select the exposure you want for each from the drop-down

menus, and go to “10. Select Start Capture.” on page 112.

7. For EPIC MYSTERIUM-X or SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X, select one (1) of the following:

‒ Save As user HS: The calibration map created by black shading will overwrite the user HS calibration

map. User HS is the name for the current in-camera user-created calibration map.

‒ Save To Media: The calibration map created by black shading will be saved to an SSD.

‒ Leave both Save check boxes deselected: The calibration will only be applied until the camera turns off,

and will not be saved.

8. For EPIC MYSTERIUM-X or SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X, select the last check box. The label for the check box

is the name of the user-created calibration map you will be overwriting.

NOTE: If the calibration map name is “empty”, that means that the only calibration map on your camera is

the factory calibration.

NOTE: The Start Capture button is disabled until you select this check box.

9. For EPIC MYSTERIUM-X or SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X, select the exposure you want to use for the calibration

from the drop-down menu.

10. Select Start Capture.

A dialog box displays, reminding you to cover the sensor and insert an SSD.

Select OK to continue.

The system initializes and then makes multiple passes through the following phases of the calibration:

‒ Capturing

‒ Analyzing

‒ Erasing

‒ Programming

11. When the Calibration Successful dialog displays, select OK to complete black shading.

The new calibration map is automatically selected.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

CALIBRATION MAP NAMING CONVENTIONS

Each calibration map has a unique name that uses the format described in the table below:

NAME DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

Exposure Current exposure; to set exposure, go to Menu > Setting > Projects > Exposure 48

Sensor

Temperature

Sensor temperature (Celsius); in the Lower Status Row, this is the number to the

left of the forward slash (Temp: 34/35)

32C

Year Year that the calibration map is created (yyyy) 2014

Month Month that the calibration map is created (mm) 01

Day Day that the calibration map is created (dd) 28

Time Time according to the 24-hour clock in the camera (hhmmss) 122150

For example, a sequence of calibration maps may look like this:

1. 48_32C_20140128122150

2. 72_34C_20140128122858

3. 120_41C_20140128124306

NOTE: If you mount an SSD with calibration files to your computer, each calibration map displays as a sub-

folder in a folder called Calibration. To save a calibration map to your hard drive, copy the entire sub-folder (for

example, 48_32C_20140128122150) to your drive.

CALIBRATION MANAGEMENT

Use the Calibration Management menu to apply, import, and export calibration maps.

 Calibration Map: The calibration maps that are saved internally on the camera:

‒ Factory: This is the calibration map generated during the manufacturing process, and is the default

map.

‒ User HS: The user-created calibration map.

 Media: The calibration maps that are on the SSD in the path shown (for example, S-SSD\calibration).

CALIBRATION MAP ACTIONS

 Set: Apply the selected camera calibration map.

 Delete: Delete the selected camera calibration map. You cannot delete the factory map.

 Apply: Apply the selected calibration map from the SSD temporarily (without importing to the camera).

EXPORT AND IMPORT CALIBRATION MAPS

Calibration maps can be stored on the camera or transferred to SSD to be shared with other cameras. You can

also build a library of calibration maps to use in different settings.



: Export selected calibration map from camera to SSD.

 : Import selected calibration map from SSD to camera. This overwrites the user HS calibration map.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 114

GYROSCOPE AND ACCELEROMETER CALIBRATION

The internal three-axis gyroscope and three-axis accelerometer need to be calibrated for the Horizon overlay

to function properly. The Gyro/Acc calibration file is stored in the flash memory of the BRAIN, so you DO NOT

need to recalibrate after restoring the camera or upgrading firmware. For more information, go to “Horizon” on

page 72.

To calibrate the Horizon overlay, follow the instructions below:

1. Turn on the BRAIN and place it on a level surface.

2. Wait for the camera core temperature to reach room temperature.

3. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Calibration > Gyro/Acc and select Low Temperature Calibration.

4. After the calibration finishes, wait for the camera core temperature to reach maximum operating temperature.

5. When the BRAIN reaches maximum operating temperature, select High Temperature Calibration.

LENS CALIBRATION

There are many electronic lenses that are compatible with the DSMC Canon Mount or DSMC Nikon Mount, but

are not electronically supported by the DSMC. The Lens Calibration feature allows you to create custom lens

configuration files for these electronic lenses so that you can use rack focus and autofocus.

A custom configuration file might not make an unsupported lens as precise as a fully supported lens. However,

a custom configuration file provides the aperture range and focal lengths so that you can electronically control

the lens with the camera.

NOTE: The camera may not be able to calibrate some electronic lenses.

NOTE: The camera does not create calibration files for lenses that are already electronically supported. For a full

list of supported lenses, go to “Lens Mounts and Lenses” on page 209.

CREATE LENS CALIBRATION FILES

The calibration process creates a calibration file for the current focal length of the electronic lens. Calibrate the

lens at each available focal length to create a full lens calibration file.

1. Attach a DSMC Canon Mount or DSMC Nikon Mount to the BRAIN.

2. Attach an electronic lens.

3. Manually set the first focal length you want to calibrate.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

4. There are two (2) ways to start the lens calibration process:

‒ When you attach a lens that the camera does not recognize, the “Unsupported Lens Found” dialog box

displays and asks if you want to calibrate the lens. Select Create Custom Lens Config.

‒ Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Calibrate > Lens and select Create....

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 116

The lens calibration process for the current focal length starts and a progress bar displays. Once the

calibration process starts, DO NOT touch the lens, as doing so may cause the lens to calibrate incorrectly.

5. Select OK after the calibration file is created.

6. To calibrate the next focal length, follow the instructions below:

A. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Calibrate > Lens.

B. Select the calibration file name in the Camera list and select Edit....

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

C. Manually set the next focal length.

D. Select Add Cal @ xx..., where “xx” is the current focal length.

NOTE: If you calibrate a focal length that has already been calibrated, the new files overrides the previ-

ous file.

The lens calibration process for the current focal length starts and a progress bar displays. Once the

calibration process starts, DO NOT touch the lens, since that may cause incorrect calibration.

7. Repeat Step 6 for each focal length of the lens.

The lens calibration file remains on the camera after system restores and firmware upgrades.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 118

VIEW AND MODIFY LENS CALIBRATION INFORMATION

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Calibrate > Lens.

2. Select the calibration file name in the Camera list and select Edit....

The following information displays:

‒ Mount Type

‒ Focal Length

‒ F Stop Range: Overall aperture range of lens.

‒ Lens Status

‒ Calibrated Focal Lengths

3. You can perform any of the following actions:

‒ Add Cal @ xx...: Calibrate the current focal length; “xx” is the current focal length.

‒ Remove Cal: Remove the calibration for the selected focal length.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

EXPORT AND IMPORT LENS CALIBRATION FILES

Lens calibration files can be stored on the camera or transferred to SSD to be shared with other cameras.

When exporting lens calibration files from camera to SSD, the files are saved to a folder on the SSD called

“lens_cal”.

DO NOT change the file name of the calibration file after you save it to an SSD.

 : Export selected file from camera to SSD.

 All : Export all files from camera to SSD.

 : Import selected file from SSD to camera.

 All: Import all files from SSD to camera.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 120

LENS CALIBRATION ACTIONS

 Edit...: View and edit the selected file.

 Delete: Delete the selected file.

 Create...: Create a new file. This option is disabled if you already have a calibration file for the attached lens.

 Prompt for calibration of unsupported lenses: Select this check box to ensure that the “Unsupported Lens

Found” dialog box displays every time the camera detects an unsupported electronic lens at boot-up.

Deselect this check box to disable the “Unsupported Lens Found” dialog box.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SELF-TEST

The Self-Test menu includes: Enable Sensor Test Pattern and Touchscreen.

ENABLE/DISABLE SENSOR TEST PATTERN

The Sensor Test Pattern feature is only used during manufacturing. The sensor test pattern is a white screen.

TOUCHSCREEN

To perform a touchscreen self-test, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Self Test.

2. Select Touchscreen.

A grid of green squares displays on the touchscreen.

3. Touch each box with your finger.

Each green box turns blue.

4. To exit the self-test, perform one (1) of the following actions:

‒ Touch all of the boxes, so that they are all blue.

‒ Press and hold the touchscreen.

‒ Press the Enter or Menu button on the DSMC Side Handle or REDMOTE.

RESTORE SYSTEM

Restore System changes all settings to the factory default values. To perform a System Restore, follow the

instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance.

2. Select Restore System.

3. Select Yes on the screen that asks you to confirm the System Restore.

The BRAIN turns off.

4. Turn on the BRAIN.

NOTE: After performing a system restore, pair the REDMOTE to the camera again.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 122

REDISCOVER (HARDWARE REDISCOVER)

Rediscovers all hardware and caches the data for future boot cycles. Perform a Hardware Rediscover if a

module or lens mount is not functioning correctly.

To perform a Hardware Rediscover, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance.

2. Select Rediscover.

3. Select Yes on the screen that asks you to confirm the Hardware Rediscover.

The BRAIN turns off.

4. Turn on the BRAIN.

SYSTEM STATUS

The System Status menu displays key project and system information on the following tabs: Project Status,

Module Status, Camera Info, and Media Info.

PROJECT STATUS

Displays the current camera and project settings.

MODULE STATUS

Displays which modules are attached to the BRAIN.

 Not Detected: The module is either not attached, or is not detected by the BRAIN.

 Attached: The module is attached and detected.

CAMERA INFO

Displays the following camera information:

 Type: Camera type (EPIC or SCARLET) and sensor type.

 Firmware Version: Current firmware version.

 PIN: The personal identification number that is specific to your camera.

 SVN Revision: The current firmware number.

 Runtime: The number of hours that the camera has been turned on.

MEDIA INFO

Displays the following media information:

 Active Media: Active media, module type.

 Model Number: Storage capacity, SSD type, and version/revision of the SSD.

 Serial Number: Serial number of the SSD.

 Firmware Version: Firmware version of the SSD.

 Size: Total capacity on the SSD.

 Size Available: Total capacity left on the SSD that can be recorded to.

NOTE: When an SSD is not attached, the Media Info tab displays “No Active Media is Present”.

OLPF

NOTE: The OLPF menu is only available on an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON.

RED offers multiple optical low-pass filters (OLPFs) for EPIC DRAGON and SCARLET DRAGON. Each OLPF

optimizes certain characteristics to take full advantage and control of each shooting environment. The camera

checks the OLPF type, and adjusts the color scienced based on the selected OLPF.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

CHECK INSTALLED OLPF (IF YOU HAVE A FIXED OLPF)

If your DSMC has a fixed OLPF (if you do not have the DSMC Interchangeable OLPF system), then your camera

automatically detects which OLPF is installed.

To see which OLPF is installed when you have a fixed OLPF, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > OLPF.

The OLPF type displays:

‒ SKIN TONE-HIGHLIGHT: Also known as “OLPF, Version 2”. Currently shipping in new cameras unless oth-

erwise requested.

‒ LOW LIGHT OPTIMIZED: Also known as “OLPF, Version 1”.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 124

SELECT OLPF TYPE (IF YOU HAVE THE DSMC INTERCHANGEABLE OLPF SYSTEM)

If your DSMC has the DSMC Interchangeable OLPF system, then you must select the correct OLPF type that

is installed.

Select your OLPF type by following the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > OLPF.

2. Select your OLPF type from the Type drop-down menu:

IMPORTANT: Ensure the correct OLPF type is selected from the drop-down menu. Failure to select the

correct OLPF type will affect color accuracy.

NOTE: If you are unsure which OLPF is installed, go to “Verify Installed OLPF” on page 48.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

MEDIA MENU

The Media Menu allows you to format and eject an SSD and to view and load clips on the SSD.

For more information about using media, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/

downloads.

DEVICE

Format and eject (unmount) the SSD.

CLIPS

View and load clips on the SSD in thumbnail view.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 126

PLAYBACK MENU

To view clips from the SSD:

 Go to Menu > Playback.

 Press the Record/Playback toggle in the lower left corner of the touchscreen.

NOTE: The camera uses RGB color space in Playback mode by default, regardless of settings in Record mode.

To playback clips in RAW mode, go to Menu > Settings > Display > Tools and select RAW.

PLAYBACK MENUS

In Playback mode, the menu is pared-down, so you cannot access all menus. Some menus offer different

options.

MEDIA

Lists all available clips on the attached SSD. You can perform the following actions:

 : Move selected clip to the Play List.

 All : Move all clips to the Play List.

 Apply Image Metadata: Image data (such as color, gain, and curves) recorded with the image displays with

the playback image. When deselected, the current playback Look settings are used.

 Load: Closes the menu and brings up the selected clip in Playback mode.

RECORD (EXIT)

Select Record to exit Playback mode. You can also press any button mapped to Record to exit Playback mode.

META

Displays the metadata for the selected clip.

PLAYBACK STATUS BAR

Displays the progress of the clip during playback. When using the touchscreen, swipe your finger right and left

to fast-forward and rewind the clip, respectively.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

PLAYBACK CONTROLS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 13

9 10 11 12

14 15 17 1816

Playback Controls

Play Options

Marker Options

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 128

The table below describes the Playback controls.

# CONTROL DESCRIPTION

1 Clips View clips as thumbnails

2 Load Previous Clip Loads the previous clip in the playlist.

3 Frame-by-Frame Reverse Moves through the clip frame-by-frame in reverse.

4 Reverse Play/Pause toggle Plays clip in reverse, and toggles between play and pause.

5 Play/Pause toggle Toggles between play and pause.

6 Frame-by-Frame Forward Moves through the clip frame-by-frame.

7 Load Next Clip Loads the next clip in the playlist.

8 Play Options Displays the following subset of options: Play Once, Loop, Loop Playlist,

and Playback Speed.

9 Play Once Plays clip to the end, and does not repeat the clip.

10 Loop Plays the clip on a loop.

11 Loop Playlist Loops all clips in the playlist. To create a playlist, go to Menu > Playback >

Menu > Media > Playlist, and move clips to the Play List field.

12 Playback Speed Option to select x1, x2, x4, x8, or x16 playback speed.

13 Marker Options Displays the following subset of options: In Point, Remove In/Out Point,

Out Point, Previous Marker, and Next Marker.

14 In Point Sets a red In Point marker in the Playback Status Bar. Use an In Point

marker in conjunction with an Out Point marker to play only a certain

portion of a clip. The In/Out Point markers help when the clip is long and

you want to focus on a particular segment.

15 Remove In/Out Point Removes the In/Out Point markers and skips to the end of the clip.

16 Out Point Sets a red Out Point marker in the Playback Status Bar. Use an Out

Point marker in conjunction with an In Point marker to play only a certain

portion of a clip. The In/Out Point markers help when the clip is long and

you want to focus on a particular segment.

17 Previous Marker Goes to the previous marked frame, which displays as a red line in the

Playback Status Bar. Disabled when there are no marked frames.

18 Next Marker Goes to the next marked frame, which displays as a red line in the

Playback Status Bar. Disabled when there are no marked frames.

1. Thumbnail view is only available on an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON. On MYSTERIUM-X cameras, a logo appears instead of a

thumbnail.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

POWER MENU

The Power menu displays the power status of all attached power sources and allows you to turn off the camera.

NOTE: For more information about powering the DSMC, see the DSMC Power Operation Guide, available at

www.red.com/downloads.

POWER IN

The power status displays for the BRAIN DC, DSMC Side Handle, Rear 1, Rear 2, Rear 3, and Rear 4. The menu

displays the voltage of the source or the percentage of the power left, as well as the time left, if applicable.

POWER OUT

The Power Out menu shows the status of the power out ports on the Pro I/O Module and the +1 Adaptor Module

. The statuses are:

 N/A: The device is not present.

 OK: The power out port is functional.

 FAULT: A short or overcurrent tripped the electronic fuse. Remove the device that is connected to the

module, as it may be drawing too much power. Select RESET to clear the fault.

POWER SAVE

You can select the following power saving options (the default for each is Never):

 Low Power Preview: The camera uses a lower amount of power after the specified period of inactivity.

 Sleep: All monitors turn off and keys do not perform mapped actions after the specified period of inactivity.

Tap the touchscreen or press a key to exit Sleep mode.

 Auto Shutdown: The camera turns off after the specified period of activity.

SHUTDOWN

Shutdown controls are interlocked to prevent the camera from being accidentally turned off. For more information

about different ways to turn off your camera, go to “Turn Off the BRAIN” on page 36.

1. Go to Menu > Power.

2. Select Shutdown.

The Shutting Down... message displays and the camera turns off.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 130

HDRX MENU

NOTE: HDRX mode cannot be modified when test signals are enabled.

NOTE: You cannot change the exposure when HDRX is enabled.

NOTE: You cannot use HDRX mode when:

‒ A MOTION MOUNT is installed.

‒ A Sensor Sync Mode (Genlock or MoCo) is enabled.

‒ Speed Ramp mode is enabled.

‒ A Frame Processing mode (Frame Summing or Frame Averaging) is enabled.

By default HDRX is disabled, and the HDRX indicator in the Lower Status Row is gray.

To enable HDRX, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > HDRX.

2. Select HDRX.

The HDRX text in the Lower Status Row turns white.

3. Select the number of Factors. The range is 1–6, and the default is 2.

4. Select which track you want the display to show:

‒ A Track: This track shows the video with the selected aperture and exposure settings applied.

‒ X Track: This track shows the video with the additional stops applied.

NOTE: For more information, see the High Dynamic Range Video with HDRx article, available at www.red.com/

learn/red-101/hdrx-high-dynamic-range-video.

FOCUS MENU

The Focus menu includes: Mode and Rack.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

MODE TAB

The Mode Tab is used to enable and select Focus parameters, including Mode, Zone, Size, and Enhanced A/F.

MODE

Select one (1) of the following from the Mode drop-down menu:

 Manual: When selected, all focus operations are manual.

 Confirm: Enables the Center or Spot focus target. This mode provides additional focus assistance by using

red, yellow, and green color changes to the focus spot window. Inadequate subject illumination and/or

contrast may interfere using Confirm mode.

For best results with Confirm mode, “rock” the focus ring: Focus through the point of optimal focusing and

back again in decreasing amplitude, as when “zeroing-in” for precision manual focus.

Focus Menu: Mode

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 132

AUTOFOCUS MODES (DSMC, NIKON, AND CANON MOUNTS)

When any of the following conditions are met, the Modes drop-down menu has additional options:

 DSMC Nikon Mount and a supported lens is attached. The lens focus switch is set to “A” or “M/A”.

 DSMC Canon Mount and a supported lens is attached. The lens focus switch is set to “AF”.

 DSMC Canon MOTION MOUNT and a supported lens is attached. The lens focus switch is set to “AF”.

When any of the above conditions are met, the following options display in the Modes drop-down menu:

 Single: When you press the key mapped to AF: Start, the camera performs single-shot AF. Optimized for

rapid focus even under low-contrast conditions. Works with both Center and Spot zones.

 Continuous: When you press the key mapped to AF: Start, the camera attempts to keep objects in the target

in focus. Works best with good lighting and contrast. Works with both Center and Spot zones.

 Touch Track: Dynamically updates a positionable AF point using the touchscreen. Only works with Spot

zone. Keep target on subject while moving across frame, as the lens continuously focuses on that target.

 Rack: Enables rack focus. Only works with Spot zone. For more information, go to “Rack Focus” on page

134.

In Single, Continuous, and Touch Track modes, a single target displays on the screen that indicates where

the image will be in focus. In Rack mode, multiple targets display on the screen to indicate the different areas

between which the camera will rack focus.

Press the key mapped to AF Mode: Cycle (REDMOTE/DSMC Side Handle button A default) to cycle through

the Focus Mode options in order.

Autofocus performance may be reduced under the following conditions:

 Subject is dark or distant.

 Inadequate contrast between the subject and background.

 Scene has reflective highlights.

 Subject is backlit.

 Inadequate surface contrast/detail inside the window.

NOTE: Use Edge mode for assistance in these conditions. For more information, go to “Edge” on page 71.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

ZONE

Available zones are Center and Spot (default). Both the Center and Spot targets change color to indicate the

focus state of the objects in the targets.

TARGET COLOR DESCRIPTION

Blue Camera is focusing

Red Objects are out of focus

Yellow Objects are almost in focus

Green Objects are in focus

CENTER

Provides a large target square for focus that is centered in the recording area.

SPOT

Provides a small target for precise focus that you can move around the recording area.

MOVE THE SPOT FOCUS TARGET

Move Spot target with touchscreen:

 Tap and hold the touchscreen on the location you want to relocate the Spot target.

 Tap and hold the touchscreen where the Spot target currently is, and drag the Spot target.

Move Spot target with DSMC Side Handle or REDMOTE:

1. Go to the main screen.

2. Press the Down Arrow in the Navigation Group.

The Spot target line weight increases and the red cursor under Menu dims slightly.

3. Use the directional arrows to move the Spot target to the desired location.

4. Press ENTER.

5. To exit, press the Menu button.

SIZE

Choose a sizes for the Spot target.

ENHANCED A/F

Enhanced A/F is an autofocus algorithm that offers better performance and improved visual indicators in

Confirm mode.

ENABLE ENHANCED A/F

1. Go to Menu > Focus > Mode.

2. Select Confirm from the Mode drop-down menu.

3. Select an option from the Zone drop-down menu.

4. If you selected Spot from the Zone drop-down menu, select a size from the Size drop-down menu.

5. Select the Enhanced A/F check box.

6. Select the monitor dedicated to using the Enhanced A/F feature from the Monitor drop-down menu:

‒ BRAIN HDMI

‒ BRAIN HD-SDI

The selected monitor is in Clean mode (no overlay) with a set resolution of 720p and update frequency of

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 134

60 Hz. The target does not display on the selected monitor. You cannot control the monitor until you disable

the Enhanced A/F feature.

7. Select the Confirm target style from the Confirm Style drop-down menu:

CONFIRM

STYLE

DESCRIPTION OBJECTS IN TARGET ARE IN

FOCUS...

OBJECTS IN TARGET ARE OUT OF

FOCUS

None Square target; operates

like the target square in

Confirm mode

Target is yellow or green Target is red

Circle Yellow circle around a

square target

Target is yellow or green; circle is

almost the same size as the square

Target is red; circle gets bigger

Bar Bar target Target is yellow or green; vertical

bar on the right side is filled up

Target is red; vertical bar on the

left side is almost empty

Pie Pie target Target is yellow or green; line

around the curve is filled up

Target is red; line around the

curve is almost empty

8. Close the Focus menu.

The target displays on the touchscreen, and the monitor that you selected for the Enhanced A/F feature is

in Clean mode.

RACK FOCUS

Use the Rack tab to configure up to four (4) focus points and execute rack focus between them.

SET UP RACK FOCUS

1. Ensure that a DSMC Nikon Mount, DSMC Canon Mount, or DSMC Canon MOTION MOUNT is installed and

that a supported lens is attached to the BRAIN.

2. Go to Menu > Focus > Mode.

3. Select Rack from the Mode drop-down menu.

Spot is automatically selected from the Zone drop-down menu, since rack focus only works with Spot zone.

4. Select a size from the Size drop-down menu.

5. Go to the Rack tab.

6. Use the Rack Speed slider to change the speed at which the lens moves. Move the slider to the left for a

slower speed, and to the right for a faster speed.

7. Select the number of rack points (1–4) from the Rack Points drop-down menu.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

8. To reset the focus distance to the value calculated by the autofocus algorithm, select Re-Autofocus.

9. To set a rack point location, follow the instructions below:

A. Select the rack point: A, B, C, or D.

B. Select Close to return to the main screen.

C. Tap and hold the touchscreen where you want the rack point to be, or press and drag the rack point.

When you move a rack point, the camera autofocuses.

NOTE: To prevent a rack point from being accidentally moved, the rack point is less sensitive to touch

than the other focus targets. To fine-tune the rack point location, first drag the rack point farther than

it needs to be, and then drag it to where you want it to be.

NOTE: To view the focus distance for each rack point on the main screen, go to Menu > Settings > Display

> Modes and enable Rack Show Distance mode. For more information, go to “Lens Tab” on page 79.

10. Select another rack point by performing any of the following actions:

‒ Select another rack point on the touchscreen.

‒ Press the key mapped to AF: Start (default is SH Record Half Press) to cycle to the next rack point in

order (A, B, C, and D). For example, if rack point A is selected when you trigger the AF: Start action,

the focus racks from point A to point B.

‒ Press a key that is mapped to racking to a specific rack point.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 136

MAP KEYS TO CYCLE RACK FOCUS

You can map user keys to rack focus to different rack points. For more information, go to “Keys” on page 104.

You can map the following actions:

 AF: Start

 AF: Rack to A

 AF: Rack to B

 AF: Rack to C

 AF: Rack to D

EXPOSURE ASSIST

The Exposure Assist menu provides access to settings for the Auto Exposure (AE) feature. The AE feature

maintains a constant image brightness, even if the actual scene brightness changes.

The AE feature is different than traditional AE, in that RED AE only controls the amount of light that hits the

sensor, either by adjusting aperture or exposure. RED AE analyzes RAW data before the ISO curve, and ensures

that the sensor matches the user-selected brightness.

AUTO EXPOSURE MODES

The Exposure Assist modes determine when the AE tools go into effect:

 Off: The AE tools are not enabled.

 Single Shot: Map one of the following actions to trigger the AE tools:

‒ AE: Start

‒ AE/AF: Start

 Continuous in Preview: The AE tools are enabled in preview only.

 Continuous in Preview/Record: The AE tools are enabled in both preview and record.

NOTE: In Stills mode, AE/AF: Start is mapped to Record Half Press by default. For more information, go to

“Default Key Functions” on page 219.

EXPOSURE PRIORITY

 Manual: You have full control of aperture and shutter. (Default)

 Auto: The camera sets the aperture and shutter to meet the selected exposure.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

 Av (Aperture Value): You set the aperture, and then the camera sets the shutter to meet the selected

exposure.

 Tv (Time Value): You set the shutter, and then the camera sets the aperture to meet the selected exposure.

EXP COMP AND EV SHIFT

Use the Exp Comp (Exposure Compensation) slider and the EV Shift setting to adjust the brightness of the image.

The default setting of zero (0) attempts to match the average brightness on an 18% gray-target. When AE is

enabled, the target and current measured brightness for the selected metering area display in the histogram as

a gray and white line, respectively.

You can also map these actions to user keys:

 AE: Decrease EV Offset: Reduces the EV Offset in increments of 0.2.

 AE: Increase EV Offset: Increases the EV Offset in increments of 0.2.

METERING MODE

Metering determines the area of the sensor that is used for brightness evaluation:

 Spot: Weights the measurement to the center 5% of the sensor, approximately.

 Center: Weights the measurement to the center 25% of the sensor, approximately.

 Average: Averages the entire image area of the sensor.

SPEED

The Speed setting determines how quickly the algorithm adapts to changing light.

 Slow: Settings adapt in small steps. Use this setting for fewer and gradual adjustments.

 Normal: Settings adapt in medium steps.

 Fast: Settings adapt in large steps.

SELECTION

The Selection setting determines which values the algorithm uses. This enables you to modify the list of values

so that the algorithm selects only specific parameters. Use Free Value Selection to improve accuracy.

For example, you can modify the aperture list to include f/2.8 and f/5.6. If Free Value Selection is enabled, the

algorithm only selects aperture parameters between f/2.8 and f/5.6. This setting limits the range of focal depth.

AE INDICATORS

When the AE feature is able to match the sensor brightness, the overlay turns yellow. If the brightness fluctuates

more than half of a stop, the overlay turns red.

When AE is enabled, the “AE” indicator displays before the aperture and exposure parameters in the Upper

Status Row. The user-selected brightness and current measured brightness display in the histogram as gray

and white lines, respectively.

AE LIMITS

All limits, includes custom modifications made to available menu items, are taken into account when AE is

active. For example, if you modify the available list of exposure values, only those values are considered.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 138

PRESETS MENU

The DSMC has three (3) types of presets:

 Camera Presets: These store and recall camera setup information, such as in-camera Looks, key mappings,

I/O configurations, and more. The DSMC has a number of factory-installed presets.

 Looks: These allow you to save the specific color, image, white balance, and detail settings to be used

for other projects. Looks that are generated in-camera display on the Camera Presets tab. Looks that are

generated in REDCINE-X PRO and are imported to the DSMC display on the Looks tab.

 Auto Presets: These allow you to specify pre-selected presets for Startup, Preview, Motion, Stills, and

Playback.

You can create custom presets and Looks. Presets and Looks can be stored on the camera or transferred to

SSD, so that you can build a library of presets and Looks, or quickly copy presets and Looks from one camera

to another via SSD.

 Camera: Presets or Looks that are saved internally on the camera.

 Media: Presets or Looks that are on the SSD in the path shown (for example, On Media: \presets:).

CAMERA PRESETS

PRESETS ACTIONS

 Apply: Apply the selected preset.

 Create...: Create a new preset using the current settings.

 Update...: Update the selected preset by allowing the parameter set to be modified and all the values to

be updated to their current in-camera values. You cannot update factory-installed presets, which end with

“(RED)”.

 Clone...: Create a new preset using the selected preset as a template.

 Delete: Delete the selected preset.

Presets Menu

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

EXPORT AND IMPORT PRESETS

Presets can be stored on the camera or transferred to SSD to be shared with other cameras. When exporting

presets from camera to an SSD, the presets are saved to a folder on the SSD called “Presets”. When importing

presets from an SSD to camera, the presets must be stored on the SSD in a folder called “Presets”.



: Export selected preset from camera to SSD.

 All : Export all presets from camera to SSD.

 : Import selected preset from SSD to camera.

 All: Import all presets from SSD to camera.

CREATE PRESETS

1. Set up the camera how you want the preset to be configured.

For example, if you want to create a preset specifically for your zebra indicators, first go to Menu > Settings

> Display > Zebra and configure the zebras the exact way that you want them to be in the preset.

2. Go to Presets > Camera Presets.

3. Select Create, or select an existing preset and select Clone or Update.

4. If creating a new preset, enter a name for the preset and select OK.

5. Select the following tabs to display different sets of preset options: Display, Key, Look, Project, and System.

6. Select the following:

‒ : Add selected setting to the preset.

‒ All : Add all settings to the preset.

‒ X: Remove selected setting from the preset.

7. Select Create.

The preset is saved and stored in the camera.

LOOKS

A Look is made up of the following settings: Color, Gain, FLUT, Sharpness, Curves, Color/Gamma, Color

Temperature, and LGG (Lift, Gamma, Gain). These settings are configured either in-camera (in Menu > Settings

> Look) or in REDCINE-X PRO (in the Looks panel).

CREATE AND MANAGE IN-CAMERA LOOKS

Create in-camera looks in the Menu > Presets > Camera Presets tab. Modify and manage the in-camera Looks

the same way as any other presets created in the Camera Presets tab. For more information, go to “Camera

Presets” on page 138.

IMPORT LOOKS FROM REDCINE-X PRO

1. While your SSD is mounted to your computer, create a folder on the SSD called Looks.

2. Save your RMD files (that have been exported from REDCINE-X PRO) to the Looks folder on the SSD.

3. Eject the SSD from your computer.

4. Mount the SSD to your DSMC.

5. Go to Presets > Looks.

6. Select one (1) of the following:

‒

: Import selected Look from SSD to camera.

‒ All: Import all Looks from SSD to camera.

For more information, see the “REDCINE-X PRO: Saving Looks to Camera” video tutorial, available at www.red.

com/learn/workflow/redcine-x-saving-looks-camera.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 140

MANAGE IMPORTED LOOKS

Manage Looks imported from REDCINE-X PRO in the Presets > Looks tab. When exporting Looks from camera

to SSD, the Looks are saved to a folder on the SSD called “Looks”.

You can perform the following actions with imported Looks:

 : Export selected Looks from camera to SSD.

 All : Export all Looks from camera to SSD.

 Apply: Apply the selected Look.

 Delete: Delete the selected Look.

AUTO PRESETS

 On Startup: The selected preset is applied every time the camera is turned on.

 On Enter Preview: The selected preset is applied every time the camera enters Preview mode, including at

startup and when exiting Playback mode.

 On Enter Playback: The selected preset is applied every time the camera enters Playback mode.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 141

OVERVIEW

The DSMC

can record up to two (2) discrete stereo channels of uncompressed 24-bit, 48 KHz audio. A Pro

I/O Module provides two (2) channels of microphone level or line level audio inputs, and up to four (4) digital

AES audio inputs. In total, the DSMC supports eight (8) incoming audio channels, and can record up to four (4)

audio channels.

Input signals are routed via a high-quality pre-amplifier and soft clip analog limiter (the limiter is optional) to

achieve the desired recording levels and maximize dynamic range.

Audio data is synchronized with video and timecode and embedded in the R3D

file. You can export audio data

from REDCINE-X PRO

as separate audio files.

Audio is also embedded in any HD-SDI and HDMI

output connected to the DSMC BRAIN

For more information about using the Pro I/O Module, see the Pro I/O Operation Guide, available at www.red.

com/downloads.

AUDIO DATA PATH

The diagram below shows how the DSMC records and outputs audio.

AUDIO DATA PATH

ANALOG INPUT GAIN /

MODE / LIMITER

CHANNEL

SELECTION

PEAK

ANALYSIS

DIGITAL

OUTPUT MIXER

ANALOG

OUTPUT GAIN

PEAK

4 CH TO 2 CH

MIXER

CAM

ANALOG 1

CAM

HEADPHONE L

CAM

HEADPHONE R

PRO I/O

LINE 1

PRO I/O

LINE 2

MONITOR

LINE 1

MONITOR

LINE 2

CAM

ANALOG 2

PRO I/O

ANALOG 1

PRO I/O

ANALOG 2

PRO I/O

AES 1

PRO I/O

AES 2

PRO I/O

AES 3

PRO I/O

AES 4

INPUT CHANNEL MAPPING

4 CH TO 2 CH

MIXER

4 CH TO 2 CH

MIXER

PEAK

CH 1/2

CH 3/4

R3D

RECORDING

PRE-MIXER

PEAK METER

POST-MIXER

PEAK METER

RECORD AND

MONITOR AUDIO

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 142

SET UP AUDIO

To set up audio, go to Menu > Settings > Audio, and adjust the input, pre-amplifier, headphone, and mix settings.

AUDIO INPUT (SOURCE) OPTIONS

SOURCE NAME CHANNEL PAIRS MODULE CONNECTORS

NONE N/A N/A N/A

CAM ANALOG Ch1/Ch2, Ch3/Ch4 DSMC BRAIN MIC-1, MIC-2

PRO I/O ANALOG Ch1/Ch2, Ch3/Ch4 Pro I/O Module AUDIO 3, AUDIO 4

PRO I/O AES A Ch1/Ch2, Ch3/Ch4 Pro I/O Module AES

PRO I/O AES B Ch3/Ch4 Pro I/O Module AES

NONE

Select NONE to disable recording audio.

CAM ANALOG AND PRO I/O ANALOG (MICROPHONE)

The DSMC provides two (2) microphone jacks for recording two (2) channels of microphone level analog audio.

The Pro I/O Module provides two (2) XLR connectors for recording two (2) additional channels of microphone

level audio. The sensitivity of the microphone and the pre-amp gain determine the recording level of the

microphone input.

PRO I/O ANALOG (LINE IN)

The Pro I/O Module provides two (2) XLR connectors for recording two (2) channels of line level analog audio.

Line input passes without gain through the system. The signal provided by the field production mixer or other

external line level source determines the recording level of the line input.

NOTE: Line level audio is only available via the Pro I/O Module.

PRO I/O AES A/B (DIGITAL INPUT)

The AES connector on the Pro I/O Module allows an input of 24-bit, 48 KHz AES digital audio.

NOTE: Digital input audio is only available via the Pro I/O Module.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

LINK

 Gain Sliders: Ensures that each pre-amplifier (Pre-Amp) slider has the same value. If you select the check

box while the sliders have different values, you must change one (1) slider for all sliders to sync up.

 Volume Sliders: Ensures that each headphone (Headphone) slider has the same value, so that you can

control the master volume for headphones. If you select the check box while the sliders have different

values, you must change one (1) slider for all sliders to sync up.

CHANNEL NAME

You can rename each audio channel. The default names are Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4. The channel names

display in the Audio Meter, but are not included in the clip metadata. For more information, go to “Audio Meter

(VU Meter)” on page 146.

CHANNEL MODES

Match the channel mode to the incoming audio signal.

MODE SOURCE DESCRIPTION

NONE NONE Audio recording disabled.

BALANCED CAM ANALOG,

PRO I/O ANALOG

Balanced microphone input. Enables the 48V phantom power option.

Typically used with microphones that have XLR connectors and internal

batteries.

UNBALANCED CAM ANALOG,

PRO I/O ANALOG

Unbalanced microphone input with 3.3V bias. Disables the 48V

phantom power option. Typically used with unpowered microphones

that have 3.5 mm TRS plugs.

LINE PRO I/O ANALOG Fixed input gain with limiter settings if limiter is enabled. Disables the

48V phantom power option.

AES PRO I/O AES A,

PRO I/O AES B

Only mode available for AES input. Disables the limiter and 48V

phantom power options.

PHANTOM POWER (48V POWER)

Select the 48V Power check box to enable 48V phantom power for an audio channel. The 48V phantom power

option is only available when the channel mode is set to BALANCED.

LIMITER

Select the Limiter check box to add a limiter to the analog input signal chain. Use the limiter in dynamic

environments where external mixers are not practical for controlling signal strength. The limiter is only available

with analog audio input.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 144

PRE-AMP

The pre-amplifier range is 30 dB to 60 dB. The default is 32 dB. To adjust amplification levels, follow the

instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Audio > Pre-Amp.

2. Move the Pre-Amp (pre-amplifier) sliders up and down to adjust the amplification levels.

NOTE: To link the amplification for each channel, go to Menu > Settings > Audio > Channel and select the Gain

Sliders check box. For more information, go to “Link” on page 143.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

AUDIO OUTPUT OPTIONS

 DSMC BRAIN: One (1) 2-channel headphone output. For maximum quality, use high impedance headphones.

 Pro I/O Module: One (1) XLR connector that supports 2-channel line level analog output. The signal strength

of the line out cannot be controlled, and is fixed at –15 dB gain.

 HDMI and HD-SDI monitor: Both output two (2) channels of 24-bit 48 KHz uncompressed, embedded digital

audio. Select and mix the stereo channels in the Monitor Mix menu at Menu > Settings > Audio > Monitor Mix

. To monitor audio via HDMI or HD-SDI, the third-party monitor must support audio.

CONTROL HEADPHONE VOLUME (DSMC BRAIN)

The volume range for Left and Right is –28 dB to –0 dB. The default is –9 dB. To adjust headphone volume,

use the following instructions:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Audio > Headphone.

2. Move the Headphone sliders up and down to adjust the volume.

3. To toggle mute/unmute, select ACTIVE and MUTE, respectively.

NOTE: To link the volume for Left and Right, go to Menu > Settings > Audio > Channel and select the Volume Sliders

check box. For more information, go to “Link” on page 143.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 146

CONTROL AUDIO MIX (CAM MIX, REAR MIX, AND MONITOR MIX)

The DSMC features a digital audio mixer that controls the volume and stereo settings for each input channel.

The mixer affects audio monitoring (such as headphones) and audio recorded to external devices. The mixer

DOES NOT affect audio embedded in the R3D file.

The range for each channel is 0% to 100%. The default for each active channel is 100%. Channel 3 and Channel

4 are active only when there is audio input via the Pro I/O Module.

The digital mixer normalizes each output to prevent the output from exceeding the signal range. For example, if

you pass Channel 1 to an output at 100%, and then mix Channel 2 into the same output, the level of Channel

1 decreases to 50%.

Assign each audio channel to the Left, Middle, or Right side of the stereo mix. Move the sliders up and down

to adjust the volume.

You can control the volume and stereo for each audio monitoring option:

 Cam Mix (Camera Mix): Headphones plugged into the DSMC BRAIN.

 Rear Mix: Line out plugged into the Pro I/O Module. The input gain is fixed.

 Monitor Mix: External HDMI and HD-SDI monitors that support audio.

AUDIO METER (VU METER)

The Audio Meter displays at the bottom-right corner of the viewfinder, and displays either the incoming audio

channels (default), or the outgoing audio (Cam Mix, Rear Mix, and Monitor Mix). For more information, go to

“VU Meter” on page 78.

INCOMING AUDIO CHANNELS

When you select Input as the VU Meter Source, the Audio Meter displays the incoming audio channels (default).

For more information, go to “VU Meter” on page 78. Channel 1 and Channel 2 are the default channels,

correlating with the MIC-1 and MIC-2 inputs on the DSMC BRAIN. Channel 3 and Channel 4 are grayed out

unless the camera detects audio input via the Pro I/O Module.

The channel names selected in the Audio menu determine the channel names displayed in the Audio Meter. For

more information, go to “Channel Name” on page 143.

The Audio Meter shows the incoming audio signal when a source is selected, even if the channel is not

recorded. When a channel is recorded, the channel indicator left of the Audio Meter is green.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

OUTGOING AUDIO

When you select Output as the VU Meter Source, the Audio Meter displays the Cam Mix, Rear Mix, and Monitor

Mix levels. For more information, go to “VU Meter” on page 78.

When recording to an external device, use the Output levels to help accurately monitor recorded audio.

AUDIO METER LEVELS

The DSMC updates the Audio Meter 12 times per second with the maximum signal from the last 1/12 of a

second period. The range of the Audio Meter is –52 dBFS to 0 dBFS.

The lines and colors indicate danger of clipping, as described in the table below:

LINE DBFS BAR COLOR DESCRIPTION

First line (far left border; solid) –52 dBFS Green Audio is not clipping

Second line (solid) –20 dBFS Green Audio is not clipping

Third line (dashed) –12 dBFS Yellow Audio close to clipping

Fourth line (dashed) –2 dBFS Red Audio is clipping

Fifth line (far right border; solid) 0 dBFS Red Audio is clipping (if signal exceeds –1 dBFS,

the whole bar is red)

NOTE: In the American broadcast and post production systems, –20 dBFS roughly corresponds to 0 VU and 4

dBu. In a digital system, dBu is an approximation; the correct unit for digital audio levels is dBFS.

AUDIO DURING PLAYBACK

The DSMC plays all recorded channels during playback, and automatically unmutes any muted audio outputs.

To access audio settings during playback, go to Menu > Settings > Audio and select the following tabs:

 Control

 Mix

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 148

OVERVIEW

The REDMOTE

is a remote camera control unit for the DSMC

that attaches to the rear of the DSMC BRAIN

or other expansion module. When detached from the DSMC, the REDMOTE provides wireless camera control

using the proprietary REDLINK™ protocol. Whether attached or operating wirelessly, the REDMOTE provides

access to all necessary DSMC controls, including record start/stop, Shutter Speed, White Balance, ISO, and

programmable User Keys. The color LCD displays critical camera settings, including media and battery capacity,

timecode and clip name, lens data and exposure information.

The REDMOTE has a rechargeable Lithium Ion battery that automatically recharges when docked to the camera

or other module. It can also be recharged using the built-in USB 2.0 connector. Under typical operating

conditions, the REDMOTE provides up to eight (8) hours of battery life and supports wireless communication at

a range of approximately 50 ft. The REDMOTE supports 16 (0-15) wireless channels ranging from 2.4 GHz to

2.4835 GHz. The default channel is 0.

IMPORTANT: To operate properly, upgrade both REDMOTE and DSMC firmware to the most recent version.

REDMOTE

OPERATION

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

CONTROLS, CONNECTORS, AND LEDS

This section describes the REDMOTE controls, connectors, and color LCD display.

The following table describes default REDMOTE control actions. Each control is also programmable.

# REDMOTE CONTROL DESCRIPTION

1 Stills/Motion Switch Toggles between Stills/Motion Mode, enabled in v6.0 firmware or later

2 Release Buttons Press and hold to undock the REDMOTE

5 Rocker Switch Up: Iris open; Down: Iris close

6 User Function Keys Go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219

7 Menu Button Toggle between basic and advanced DSMC menus

8 Soft Menu Buttons (1-3) Go to “Soft Menu Buttons (1-3)” on page 150

9 Soft Menu Buttons (4-8) Go to “Customize REDMOTE Setting Menus” on page 153

10 Navigation Group Go to “Navigation Group” on page 150

11 Focus/Record Button Half press initiates auto focus; full press toggles record start/stop

12 Power/Lock Switch Go to “Power/Key Lock Switch” on page 151

13 Mini-USB Power Port Charges the internal battery; upgrade firmware

For a full list of default user key actions for the REDMOTE, go to “Default Key Functions” on page 219.

COMPATIBLE CABLE

 790-0230: RED

Mini-USB-to-USB cable

REDMOTE

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 150

REDMOTE LEDS

There are two (2) status LED indicators located above the rocker switch on the left side of the LCD display.

# REDMOTE LED COLOR/FLASHING DESCRIPTION

3 Power/Recording LED Red Camera startup; camera recording

4 Status/Connectivity LED Green Camera ready; REDMOTE connected

Green flashing Searching/Establishing communication

SOFT MENU BUTTONS (1-3)

There are three (3) Primary Soft Menu Buttons located below the left side of the REDMOTE LCD. These buttons

provide quick access to REDMOTE advanced operations.

 Button 1: Access Connect Menu.

 Button 2: Toggle between Local and Remote Modes.

 Button 3: Access Setup Menu.

REDMOTE CONTROL MODES

Press Button 2 to toggle between Remote Mode and Local Mode. The current mode displays on the REDMOTE

LCD, directly above the Primary Soft Menu Buttons. Use the Scroll Wheel and Directional Keys to navigate with

the cursor. For more information, go to “Navigation Group” on page 150.

 Local Mode: Navigate menus using the REDMOTE controls and display.

 Remote Mode: Navigate menus with REDMOTE controls, using an attached LCD, EVF, or other monitor as a

reference.

NOTE: When in Remote Mode, the current menu item does not display on the REDMOTE.

REDMOTE SETUP

The Setup Menu includes:

 Turn Wireless On/Off: Toggles the REDLINK wireless link on/off.

 Setup System: Provides access to REDMOTE settings.

 Setup Slot: Program the menu slots on the REDMOTE LCD.

SETUP SYSTEM

The Setup System Menu allows you to change REDMOTE settings and shows the MAC address and REDMOTE

firmware version.

The following adjustable settings are available:

 Brightness: LCD backlight intensity. Set the value to maximum for daylight visibility, or reduce it for standard

operation and prolonged battery life. Default is Maximum.

 Volume: Volume of the REDMOTE speaker. Default is Minimum.

 Auto Shutdown: Amount of inactivity time before the REDMOTE turns off automatically. Default is off.

NAVIGATION GROUP

Use the Navigation Group to navigate the DSMC menus and change settings.

 Scroll Wheel: Select and adjust the value of a selected setting.

 Directional Keys (D-Pad): Navigate menus.

 ENTER: Press ENTER to confirm a setting or access the selected menu.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

POWER/KEY LOCK SWITCH

 Turn on: Press and hold the switch in the down position for two (2) seconds.

 Turn off: Press and hold the switch in the down position for five (5) seconds. Or, press the switch down into

the down position and release to access the Shutdown menu.

 Lock keys: Move the switch to the up position to prevent unintentional operation. “KEYS LOCKED” display

above the Primary Soft Menu Buttons when lock is enabled.

REDMOTE BASICS

This section describes the common REDMOTE operations.

DOCK THE REDMOTE

1. Position the REDMOTE V-Mount dock over the V-Mount on the BRAIN or rear module.

2. Slide the REDMOTE down until you hear a click, which indicates the REDMOTE is securely attached.

NOTE: Docking the REDMOTE automatically pairs the REDMOTE with the camera when the DSMC is turned on

and wireless settings are enabled.

UNDOCK THE REDMOTE

1. Press both Release buttons, located on the sides of the REDMOTE.

2. Slide the REDMOTE up to release from the V-Mount on the BRAIN or rear module.

3. Remove the REDMOTE.

TURN ON THE REDMOTE

 When docked, the REDMOTE automatically turns on when the DSMC is turned on.

 Slide and hold the Power/Key Lock switch in the down position for two (2) seconds, then release.

TURN OFF THE REDMOTE

 When docked, the REDMOTE automatically turns off when the camera is turned off.

 Slide and hold the Power/Key Lock switch in the down position for five (5) seconds, then release.

 Slide and hold the Power/Key Lock switch in the down position momentarily, then release. Select the desired

option from the Shutdown menu and press Enter:

‒ Shutdown Cam + REDMOTE: Turn off both DSMC and the REDMOTE

‒ Shutdown REDMOTE: Turn off the REDMOTE only.

‒ Shutdown Camera: Turn off the DSMC only. Option not available when the REDMOTE is docked.

NOTE: For maximum battery life, remove power from the REDMOTE by pressing the Power/Lock Switch down

into the off position and release. Then use the menu to turn off the device. When turning off the REDMOTE using

the Power/Lock Switch, a slight power draw remains and continues to drain the battery.

RECORD START/STOP

 Start Record: Press and release the REC button. The Power/Recording LED illuminates red and the Timecode

value on the LCD display changes to red text.

 Stop Record: Press and release the REC button. When media recording processes are complete, the Power/

Recording LED turns off and the Timecode value on the LCD display changes back to white text.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 152

PAIR THE REDMOTE

There are two (2) ways to pair the REDMOTE to a DSMC:

 Dock to pair

 Pair wirelessly

When a REDMOTE and DSMC are paired:

 The REDMOTE displays the DSMC settings.

 VIEWFINDER ouputs display green RM status and signal strength indicators in the Lower Status Row.

NOTE: You can pair the REDMOTE to multiple BRAINs. However, you can only control one BRAIN at a time.

DOCK TO PAIR

1. Turn on the BRAIN.

2. Dock the REDMOTE to the back of the BRAIN or rear module.

NOTE: When the REDMOTE is removed from the DSMC, it automatically scans for the wireless signal and

connects to that DSMC.

PAIR WIRELESSLY

1. Turn on the BRAIN.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > REDMOTE.

3. Select Scan for REDMOTEs.

4. When the scan is complete, select the REDMOTE from the scan list.

5. Select Pair ->.

6. Select Close to exit the menu.

NOTE: To see the REDMOTE MAC address, go to Setup > Setup System. The MAC address displays at the

bottom of the LCD.

7. On the REDMOTE, press Button 2.

The Connect Menu opens.

8. On the REDMOTE, use the Scroll Wheel or Directional Keys to select the DSMC from the list and press ENTER.

If the DSMC does not display, select RESCAN... and press ENTER. If the DSMC is still missing from the list,

ensure that DSMC settings are properly configured in the Communication and REDMOTE menus.

RECONNECT REDMOTE TO A PAIRED CAMERA

Follow the instructions below to reconnect the REDMOTE to a DSMC that is has been to paired to before.

1. Press Button 1 to scan for paired cameras within wireless range. A scan takes about 20–30 seconds.

NOTE: The Connect Menu is hidden on the LCD when the REDMOTE is attached to a camera or rear module.

2. Select the camera and press Enter.

The REDMOTE connects to the selected camera.

NOTE: If the REDMOTE fails to find a camera within range, select Rescan and press ENTER in the Navigation

Group to force a second scan.

RECONNECT THE REDMOTE AFTER SIGNAL LOSS

On loss of wireless communication, the REDMOTE scans for the camera it was last paired with. If the REDMOTE

is unable to reconnect after 30 seconds, the manual Scan menu opens.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DISCONNECT THE REDMOTE FROM A PAIRED DSMC

1. Press Button 1.

2. Select DISCONNECT.

3. Press ENTER.

CHARGE THE REDMOTE

A fully discharged REDMOTE battery requires approximately six (6) hours to fully charge. You can use the

REDMOTE while it charges.

Charge the REDMOTE using either of the following methods:

 Dock the REDMOTE to a camera or rear module.

 Connect the REDMOTE to a computer, cell phone charger, or other sufficient power source using the

RED Mini-USB-to-USB cable. If the power supply does not provide enough voltage, an “Error Charging”

message displays.

CHARGE INDICATORS

The battery indicator in the lower right of the REDMOTE LCD indicates remaining battery life and charge status.

 Green: The battery has a sufficient charge, or is fully charged.

 Yellow: The battery is somewhat depleted and should be recharged soon.

 Red: The battery is nearly discharged and should be recharged immediately. Wireless communication is at

risk of being lost when the battery indicator is red.

CUSTOMIZE REDMOTE SETTING MENUS

When operating the REDMOTE in Local mode, you can configure the settings displayed in each status window.

Settings can be assigned to one (1) of the five (5) pages available under Soft Menu Buttons (4-8).

To customize settings, follow the instructions below:

1. Ensure the DSMC is on and wirelessly connected to the REDMOTE.

2. If the REDMOTE is in Remote Mode, press Button 2 to toggle to Local Mode.

3. Select the Soft Menu Button (4-8) page you would like to set the desired setting on.

4. Use the Directional Keys to move the red cursor to the desired setting location.

5. Press Button 3.

6. Select Setup Slot and press ENTER.

7. Select the desired setting from the available list.

8. Press Enter.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 154

REDMOTE LCD DISPLAY MENU

The REDMOTE LCD displays key camera settings of a paired and connected DSMC. There are five (5) available

REDMOTE Setting menus, accessible with the Soft Menu Buttons (4-8).

NOTE: Soft Menu Buttons 7 and 8 are not defined.

The primary REDMOTE Setting Menu (Button 4) displays the following menu elements:

REDMOTE ITEM DESCRIPTION

HDR Displays HDRx mode status

1:1 Tallies when magnify is selected

False Color Displays false color overlay mode

LAN Indicates communication via Ethernet connection

RIG Indicates 3D rig metadata is present

SYNC Indicates sensor shutter sync status

GEN Indicates presence of valid Genlock signal/HD-SDI sync to genlock

TC Indicates presence of valid SMPTE timecode signal

Aperture Displays aperture when using supported Canon, Nikon, or Cooke lenses

Focus Dist. Displays optimum focus distance when using supported Canon, Nikon, or

Cooke lenses

Sensitivity Camera sensor sensitivity

Exposure Integration time or shutter angle

Color Temp White balance

Format Recording resolution

REDCODE REDCODE compression setting

Recording Frame Rate Current frame capture rate

Project Time Base Current project time base

Clip Filename Filename of the current clip or next clip to be shot

Histogram RGB Histogram

Model EPIC or SCARLET

Media Status Media location and remaining media capacity %

RAW Clip Meter RGB sensor RAW clipping status

Timecode Current timecode value

Battery Indicator Displays battery life or charge status of REDMOTE

Audio Meter Audio input selection and levels

Power Status Indicates DC supply voltage or % of remaining battery capacity including

current supply voltage

Camera ID Displays camera ID

Wireless Status Displays signal strength when connected wirelessly

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

UPGRADE REDMOTE FIRMWARE

This section describes the REDMOTE firmware upgrade process using Mac

, Windows

, and the DSMC.

UPGRADE REDMOTE WITH DSMC

When you dock a REDMOTE, the DSMC checks to see if the REDMOTE is running the latest firmware. If the

REDMOTE firmware is slightly outdated, you have the option to update the REDMOTE firmware through the

DSMC. If REDMOTE firmware is severely outdated, you will be instructed to install updates via USB.

NOTE: The REDMOTE and camera must be re-paired after upgrading DSMC firmware.

UPGRADE REDMOTE (MAC)

This section describes the REDMOTE firmware upgrade process using a Mac.

INSTALL REDMOTE UPGRADE UTILITY (MAC)

The REDMOTE Upgrade Utility enables you to upgrade REDMOTE firmware from your computer.

1. Download the REDMOTE Upgrade Utility, available at www.red.com/downloads.

2. Uncompress and open the zip file.

3. Open the REDMOTE_Upgrade_Utility folder.

4. Open the Mac folder.

5. Open REDMOTE.dmg.

6. Open REDMOTE Upgrade Utility.

7. Continue to “Configure REDMOTE Connection with Computer (Mac)” on page 155.

CONFIGURE REDMOTE CONNECTION WITH COMPUTER (MAC)

Next, establish a connection between the Mac and the REDMOTE.

1. Disable WiFi and disconnect the Ethernet cable connected to your computer.

NOTE: An internet connection interferes with the computer’s attempt to recognize the REDMOTE.

2. Connect a USB to mini-USB cable between the Mac and the USB connector on the REDMOTE.

NOTE: When properly connected to the computer, the battery charge indicator flashes.

3. Open System Preferences and select Network.

NOTE: This screen may open automatically when the REDMOTE is connected.

4. Look for a device called RNDIS/...Gadget.

5. Change Configure IPv4 setting to Manually.

6. In the IP Address field, enter 192.168.0.1.

7. In the Subnet Mask field, enter 255.255.255.0.

8. Click Apply.

The Status changes to Connected.

NOTE: After entering the IP address, you may not connect during the upgrade procedure. If you check the

IP address you see that it is 0.0.0.0 and the status of the device is Connected, you may need to re-enter

the IP address.

9. Go back to REDMOTE Upgrade Utility and click Connect to establish a connection with the REDMOTE.

“Connection is Established With REDMOTE” displays when connected. If the connection is not established,

then disable all internet connections and try again.

10. Go to “Upgrade REDMOTE Firmware (Mac)” on page 156.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 156

UPGRADE REDMOTE FIRMWARE (MAC)

1. Download the REDMOTE Firmware, available at www.red.com/downloads.

NOTE: Review the read_me_redmote_vX.X.XX instructions contained in the REDMOTE_vX.X.XX.zip file.

2. Uncompress the zip file.

3. Open the REDMOTE_vX.X.XX folder.

4. Click Select File in REDMOTE Upgrade Utility.

5. Open the redmote.1.bin file in the REDMOTE_Firmware_vX.X.XX folder.

“Selected File: redmote.1.bin” displays.

6. Click Start Upgrade.

When the file transfer is complete, the REDMOTE displays “Firmware Upgrade Successfully Done”.

7. Click OK.

8. Click Disconnect to close the REDMOTE Upgrade Utility.

The REDMOTE automatically reboots.

After the upgrade is complete, the REDMOTE displays “POWER UP” and then “SEARCHING”.

9. Select Cancel.

10. On the REDMOTE, go to Setup > Setup System and verify the current REDMOTE firmware version.

The REDMOTE upgrade is complete.

11. You may need to re-pair the REDMOTE with the DSMC after upgrading firmware. For more information, go

to “Pair the REDMOTE” on page 152.

UPGRADE REDMOTE (WINDOWS)

This section describes the REDMOTE firmware upgrade process using Windows.

INSTALL REDMOTE UPGRADE UTILITY (WINDOWS)

1. Download the REDMOTE Upgrade Utility, available at www.red.com/downloads.

2. Uncompress and open the zip file.

3. Open the REDMOTE_Upgrade_Utility folder.

4. Open the Win folder.

5. Open REDMOTE_upgrade_setup.exe.

6. Click Extract All.

7. Select a destination and click Extract.

NOTE: If an error occurs during the installation of the REDMOTE Upgrade Utility, right-click the setup file and

select Run as Administrator to proceed.

8. Go to the location where you extracted the DSMC_Toolkit_vX.X file.

9. Open the REDMOTE_Upgrade_Utility folder.

10. Open the Win folder.

11. Open REDMOTE_upgrade_setup.exe. The License Agreement opens.

12. Click I Agree.

13. Ensure that the Install REDMOTE Firmware update check box is selected and click Next.

14. Select a destination and click Next.

15. Select a Start Menu folder where program shortcuts will be created. Default is REDMOTE Update.

16. Click Install.

17. Click Close after setup completes successfully.

18. Go to “Configure REDMOTE Connection with Computer (Windows)” on page 157.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

CONFIGURE REDMOTE CONNECTION WITH COMPUTER (WINDOWS)

Next, you must establish a connection between the Windows and the REDMOTE.

1. Disable WiFi and disconnect the Ethernet cable connected to your computer.

NOTE: An internet connection interferes with the computer’s attempt to recognize the REDMOTE.

2. Connect a USB to mini-USB cable between the computer and the USB connector on the REDMOTE.

If connecting for the first time, a RNDIS/Gadget driver is installed on the system.

When the driver is installed, the battery charge indicator flashes on the REDMOTE.

NOTE: If the REDMOTE does not connect to the Windows computer, download the REDMOTE Firmware

file from www.red.com/downloads, open the read_me_redmote_vX.X.XX file, and follow the instructions to

manually set up the network connection. For additional assistance, contact RED SUPPORT at https://

support.red.com.

3. Open the REDMOTE_update program from the Start Menu folder you created the shortcut for.

4. Click Connect to establish a connection between the REDMOTE and REDMOTE_update.

When the REDMOTE is connected, “Connection is Established With REDMOTE” displays. If the connection

is not established, disable all internet connections and try again.

5. Go to “Upgrade REDMOTE Firmware (Windows)” on page 157.

UPGRADE REDMOTE FIRMWARE (WINDOWS)

1. Download the REDMOTE Firmware, available at www.red.com/downloads.

NOTE: Review the read_me_redmote_vX.X.XX instructions contained in the REDMOTE_vX.X.XX.zip file.

2. Uncompress the zip file.

3. Open the REDMOTE_Firmware_vX.X.XX folder.

4. Click Select File in REDMOTE Upgrade Utility.

5. Go to the redmote.1.bin file located in the REDMOTE_Firmware_vX.X.XX folder and click Open.

“Selected File: redmote.1.bin” displays.

6. Click Start Upgrade.

When the file transfer is complete, the REDMOTE displays “Firmware Upgrade Successfully Done”.

7. Click OK.

8. Click Disconnect to close the REDMOTE Upgrade Utility.

The REDMOTE reboots.

After the upgrade is complete, the REDMOTE displays “POWER UP” and then “SEARCHING”.

9. Select Cancel.

10. On the REDMOTE, go to Setup > Setup System and verify the current REDMOTE firmware version.

REDMOTE upgrade is complete.

11. You may need to re-pair the REDMOTE with the DSMC after upgrading firmware. For more information, go

to “Pair the REDMOTE” on page 152.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 158

This chapter describes timecode, genlock, and multi-camera operations such as 3D and array setup.

TIMECODE

Timecode is a numeric sequence based on SMPTE 12M that aids in the management and synchronization of

footage and audio. Timecode is embedded in recorded RAW files as metadata and in HANC metadata provided

by the HD-SDI monitor output. The camera can generate timecode on its own or can receive and sync to

timecode generated by an external source.

Timecode displays in the lower right corner of the Live Action Area on the graphical user interface (GUI) and is

embedded as metadata. Timecode is represented as an eight (8) digit sequence (HH:MM:SS:FF), where:

 HH: Hours

 MM: Minutes

 SS: Seconds

 FF: Frames

NOTE: Timecode is most accurate and effective when coupled with genlock. For more information, go to

“Genlock” on page 161.

NOTE: The BRAIN cannot output internally generated timecode on its own. A Pro I/O Module or REDCAST™

Module is required to output timecode generated by the BRAIN.

NOTE: For more information on HANC metadata, see HD-SDI HANC Metadata Information, available at www.

red.com/developers.

TIMECODE DISPLAY MODES

 Time of Day (TOD): Displays the time of day (HH:MM:SS:FF). TOD timecode runs continuously and is not

affected by recording. TOD timecode can be synchronized with the Real-Time Clock (RTC) in the camera.

 Edge: Edge timecode is continuous between clips, meaning that when recording starts, timecode begins.

and when recording stops, timecode stops. By default, Edge timecode default begins at 01:00:00:00, but

can be configured in the Media menu (Menu > Media > Device > Format).

TIMECODE, GENLOCK,

MULTI-CAMERA SETUP

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SET UP INTERNAL TIMECODE

To set up and adjust timecode generated by the camera, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to Menu > Settings > Project > Timecode.

2. Select the desired Timecode Display mode.

3. Set Source to User Provided.

4. Select the LTC Out check box to perform Linear Timecode Out, if applicable.

5. Use the additional controls to sync TOD timecode with the RTC or set manually.

Alternatively, go to Menu > Media > Device > Format Media... to set Edge timecode manually.

The TC indicator in the Lower Status Row remains gray when internal timecode is enabled.

INPUT EXTERNAL TIMECODE

To set up and adjust timecode generated by an external device, follow the instructions below.

1. Connect the external timecode generator to the camera using a 3BNC-to-00 LEMO

Sync Cable.

A. Connect the yellow BNC connector to the output on the timecode generator.

B. Connect the 00B LEMO connector to the SYNC port on the BRAIN.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Project > Timecode.

3. Select the desired Timecode Display Mode.

Source: User Provided

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 160

4. Set Source to External: BRAIN.

The TC indicator in the Lower Status Row turns green when an external timecode source is locked.

NOTE: When an external source is selected but not present, timecode displays User Provided settings.

REQUIRED CABLE

 790-0154: 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable

Source: External: BRAIN

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

GENLOCK

Generator locking (genlock) is a tri-level signal used to synchronize video and audio systems. Genlock is based

on SMPTE 296M and 274M.

There are two (2) important genlock sync modes:

 Monitor Sync

 Sensor Sync

NOTE: For genlock to function correctly, the cameras must be on the same firmware version, and must be using

the same project time base and recording frame rate.

MONITOR SYNC

Monitor Sync occurs when a genlock signal is provided that is compatible with the current monitor output

frequency. Monitor Sync is achievable even if the camera is using another form of synchronization to sync the

camera sensor.

1. Connect the desired genlock device to the camera using a 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable.

A. Connect the green BNC connector to the genlock device.

B. Connect the 00B LEMO connector to the SYNC port on the BRAIN.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control > Monitor.

3. Select BRAIN HDSDI from the drop-down menu.

4. Select the desired monitor output frequency from the Frequency drop-down menu.

NOTE: Select Auto to automatically match the HD-SDI output to the current Project Time Base.

Monitor Sync is achieved automatically when a genlock signal is provided that is compatible with the

current monitor output frequency. When Monitor Sync is achieved, the GEN indicator in the Lower Status

Row illuminates green.

HD-SDI Output Frequency

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 162

SENSOR SYNC

Sensor Sync is achieved when a genlock signal is provided that is compatible with the current monitor output

frequency, project time base, and recording frame rate. While operating in Sensor Sync, sensor timing is locked

to the genlock signal.

Sensor Sync requires the following synchronized settings:

SETTING MENU LOCATION PATH

Genlock signal frequency N/A; external genlock device

HD-SDI monitor output frequency Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control

Project Time Base Menu > Settings > Project > Frame Rate

Recording Frame Rate Menu > Settings > Project > Frame Rate

NOTE: HDRx is not available when Genlock Sensor Sync is enabled.

To set up and enable Sensor Sync Mode, follow the instructions below:

1. Connect the desired genlock device to the camera using a 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable.

A. Connect the green BNC connector to the genlock device.

B. Connect the 00B LEMO connector to the SYNC port on the BRAIN.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > GPIO/Sync > Sync.

3. Select Genlock from the Sensor Sync Mode drop-down menu.

4. Select BRAIN from the Genlock Source drop-down menu.

5. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control.

6. Select BRAIN HDSDI from the drop-down menu.

7. Select the desired monitor output frequency from the Frequency drop-down menu.

NOTE: Select Auto to automatically match the HD-SDI output to the current project time base.

The GEN indicator in the Lower Status Row turns green when a compatible genlock signal is present and

genlock is enabled. The SYNC indicator in the Lower Status Row turns green when Sensor Sync is achieved.

Sync Settings

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

MASTER/SLAVE OPERATION

This section describes operation in Master/Slave configuration and clip naming conventions for clips recorded

on those cameras. Master/Slave is the most common configuration for Stereo/3D productions.

When cameras are operated in Master/Slave configuration, you can perform the following operations:

 Power: Turn off the Master camera to turn off both cameras.

 Record: Press the PWR/REC button on the Master camera to start/stop recording on both cameras.

 Change settings: Change settings on the Master camera, to change settings on the Slave camera.

NOTE: The Master camera controls metadata and basic camera parameters of the slave cameras. Any other

setting changes required by the Slave cameras must be made before recording.

NOTE: For a Master/Slave configuration to function correctly, the cameras must be on the same firmware

version, and must be using the same project time base and recording frame rate.

SET UP MASTER/SLAVE OPERATION

1. Connect cameras using a Master/Slave Gig-E Cable.

2. On the Master camera, follow the instructions below:

A. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Communication.

B. Type a name for the camera (Example: CAM A, LEFT, MASTER, etc) in the Name field.

C. Set Target to All.

D. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Communication and select the Ethernet tab.

E. Verify the Enable Camera to Camera check box is selected.

3. On the Slave camera(s), follow the instructions below:

A. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Communication.

B. Type a name for the camera (Example: CAM B, RIGHT, SLAVE, etc) in the Name field.

Master Settings

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 164

C. For Target, select None.

D. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Communication and select the Ethernet tab.

E. Verify the Enable Camera to Camera check box is selected.

The LAN indicator in the Lower Status Row illuminates green.

NOTE: Cameras can also be set up in Master/Master configuration. To set as Master/Master, set Target to All

on both cameras, allowing either camera to make changes and control record start/stop.

Slave Settings

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SET REEL NUMBER, CAMERA ID, AND CAMERA POSITION

To prepare media and slate settings for a Master/Slave or Stereo/3D production, follow the instructions below:

1. On both Master and Slave cameras, go to Menu > Media > Device and select Format Media....

2. On both Master and Slave cameras, select the desired Reel No and Cam ID settings.

NOTE: The Reel No and Cam ID settings on both BRAINs should match.

3. On the Master camera, change the Cam Pos value to Left, representing “left eye”.

4. On the Slave camera, change the Cam Pos value to Right, representing “right eye”.

5. On both cameras, select Format... to format media and set Reel No, Cam ID, and Cam Pos settings.

NOTE: Cam ID and Cam Pos settings can also be found at Menu > Settings > Project > Slate > Camera.

MULTI-CAMERA CLIP NAMING CONVENTIONS

This section describes automatic camera-generated clip naming conventions based on slate settings. Cameras

use the Reel No, Cam ID, and Cam Pos settings to generate a custom clip name.

For example, if you have two (2) cameras in Master/Slave configuration and format media on both cameras with

the following settings:

CAMERA REEL NO CAM ID CAM POS

Master 1 S Left

Slave 1 S Right

The first clip recorded by this Master/Slave camera configuration is:

 Master: S001_L001_0503B6.R3D

 Slave: S001_R001_0503R7.R3D

NOTE: B6 and R7 are examples of camera-generated wildcard characters.

NOTE: If both camera settings are on left on the default, recorded clips will have the same filename structure.

The only exception is the camera-generated wildcard characters. For example:

 Master: A001_C001_0503B6.R3D

 Slave: A001_C001_0503R7.R3D

NOTE: Reel No, Cam ID, and Cam Pos can be set when formatting media at Menu > Media > Device.

Master Camera Settings

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 166

SET UP STEREO/3D CONFIGURATION

This section describes basic procedures for connecting two (2) DSMC BRAINs in a Master/Slave configuration

for 3D operation.

NOTE: When providing the signals to a Stereo Image Processor (SiP) for verifying 3D alignment, set the HD-SDI

monitor output on both cameras to have the same overlay configuration.

NOTE: For genlock to function correctly, the cameras must be on the same firmware version, and must be using

the same project time base and recording frame rate.

To set up a Stereo/3D setup, follow the instructions below.

1. On both cameras, set the desired project time base and recording frame rate.

2. On both cameras, follow the instructions in “Sensor Sync” on page 162 to achieve Sensor Sync genlock

status.

The GEN and SYNC indicators in the Lower Status Row illuminate green.

3. Follow the instructions in “Set Up Master/Slave Operation” on page 163 to set Master and Slave camera

settings.

4. On both cameras, follow the instructions in “Set Reel Number, Camera ID, and Camera Position” on page

165 to prepare media and camera settings.

3D CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

The diagram below is an example of how to set up a 3D configuration.

REQUIRED CABLES

 790-0163: Master/Slave Gig-E Cable

 790-0154: 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable (required per camera)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SET UP A CAMERA ARRAY

You can sync more than two (2) cameras for applications and productions that require a camera array. To set

up a camera array, you need a 1000Base-T gigabit Ethernet router.

NOTE: For genlock to function correctly, the cameras must be on the same firmware version, and must be using

the same project time base and recording frame rate.

NOTE: To operate a camera array setup from a Windows computer or workstation, you need one of several

applications provided by RED

or third-party developers.

For more information on camera control, see the REDLINK

SDK, available at www.red.com/developers.

To set up a camera array, follow the instructions below:

1. On each camera, go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Communication and set the following:

‒ On the Camera tab, set Target to All.

‒ On the Camera tab, enter a matching name in the Group field.

‒ On the Ethernet tab, ensure that Enable DHCP, Enable Camera to Camera, and Enable External Control are

all selected.

NOTE: All cameras must have the same Group name.

2. Follow the instructions in “Sensor Sync” on page 162 to connect each camera to the genlock device.

The GEN and SYNC indicators in the Lower Status Row illuminate green.

3. Follow the instructions in “Set Up Master/Slave Operation” on page 163 to set Master and Slave camera

settings.

NOTE: Instead of using the Master/Slave Gig-E Cable, connect each camera to the router using a LEMO-

To-CAT5E Ethernet Cable.

A. Connect the LEMO connector to the GIG-E port on the BRAIN.

B. Connect the Ethernet connector to the router.

4. On all cameras, follow the instructions in “Set Reel Number, Camera ID, and Camera Position” on page

165 to prepare media and camera settings.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 168

CAMERA ARRAY EXAMPLE

The diagram below is an example of how to set up a camera array.

REQUIRED CABLES

 790-0154: 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable (required per camera)

 790-0159: LEMO-To-CAT5E Ethernet Cable (9') (required per camera)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SET UP MOTION CONTROL (MOCO)

Motion Control, or “MoCo” for short, is a form of sensor synchronization used to automate precision camera

movements required for special effects and difficult shots. Motion Control uses GPIO signals transmitted using the

SYNC (GPI) and CTRL (GPO) ports on the camera BRAIN or a connected Pro I/O Module or REDCAST Module.

For more information on GPIO connections, go to “Input/Output Connectors” on page 201.

NOTE: When using MoCo, set the frame rate to be at least two times (2x) the fastest trigger rate used. When

using MoCo, REDCODE is calculated based on FPS/2. Therefore, if you are in MoCo mode, and the frame rate

is 100.83 FPS, the maximum REDCODE is calculated based on a frame rate of 50.415 FPS.

NOTE: HDRx is not available when MoCo is enabled.

NOTE: Genlock and timecode can also be used with MoCo.

To set up MoCo, follow the instructions below:

1. Connect the Motion Control device to the camera using a 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable.

‒ Sync In: Connect the white BNC connector to the Motion Control device and the 00B LEMO connector

to the SYNC port on the BRAIN.

‒ Sync Out: Connect the yellow BNC connector to the Motion Control device and the 00B LEMO connec-

tor to the CTRL port on the BRAIN.

2. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > GPIO/Sync > Sync.

3. Select MoCo from the Sensor Sync Mode drop-down menu.

4. Select the BRAIN GPIO tab.

MoCo GPIO/Sync Settings

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 170

5. Select Sync In from the GPI Function drop-down menu.

6. Select Sync Out from the GPO Function drop-down menu. (Optional)

Supply a pulse from the Motion Control device to sync the shutter to the rising edge of the sync input.

For more information, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for the Motion Control device.

REQUIRED CABLE

 790-0154: 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable (required per SYNC and CTRL port used)

MoCo BRAIN/GPIO

Settings

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

COMPATIBLE DEVICES

The following timecode and genlock devices are compatible with the camera. Additional timecode devices may

be compatible, but have not yet been tested by RED.

COMPATIBLE TIMECODE DEVICES

The following timecode devices have been confirmed for compatibility with the camera:

 Ambient ACL 202CT

 Ambient LOCKIT ACL 203

 Ambient ACL 204

 Ambient ACC 501 Clockit Controller

 Ambient ACD-301 Lockit Slate

 Denecke SB-3 Syncbox Time-Code Generator

 Sound Devices 788T

 Sound Devices 744

 Sound Devices PIX-240

 Zaxcom Nomad 12

 Zaxcom ZFR100

 Zaxcom ZFR200

COMPATIBLE GENLOCK DEVICES

The following genlock devices have been confirmed for compatibility with the camera:

 AJA

GEN10 HD/SD/AES Sync Generator with Universal Power Supply

 Ambient ACL 202CT

 Ambient ACL 203

 Ambient ACL 204

 Denecke SB-T

 Evertz Master Clock 5600MSC

NOTE: Ensure that your genlock device provides a full-strength genlock signal to each camera. Splitting a

genlock signal weakens it, which may compromise the sync between cameras.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 172

Your RED

DSMC

functionality may be upgraded by installing the latest firmware. Make a habit of frequently

visiting www.red.com/downloads to check for new versions of camera firmware, updated operation guides, and

post production software.

Your REDMOTE

also requires a firmware upgrade. For more information on upgrading your REDMOTE, go to

“Upgrade REDMOTE Firmware” on page 155.

VERIFY CURRENT CAMERA FIRMWARE

To see the firmware version that is currently installed on your DSMC, go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance >

System Status > Camera Info. A higher number reflects a later release.

UPGRADE CAMERA FIRMWARE

Install the most recent firmware. Unless otherwise specified in the online release notes, you do not need to

upgrade to any firmware in between your current version and the most recent version available online.

NOTE: You must black shade a DRAGON

after upgrading it.

NOTE: You must black shade an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON

after upgrading it.

NOTE: Upgrading your camera deletes all in-camera user-generated Preset, Look, and Custom Overlay files.

1. If you have user-generated preset files on your camera, follow the instructions below to save the files to an

SSD:

A. Turn on the camera, insert an SSD (RED MINI-MAG

or RED STATION

REDMAG™ 1.8") into the cam-

era, and format the SSD.

B. Go to Menu > Presets and copy user-generated Camera Preset and Look files to the SSD.

C. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control and copy user-generated Overlay files to the SSD.

D. Turn off the camera, and remove the SSD. You will copy the files back to your camera after the upgrade

procedure, as described in Step 14.

2. Connect an SSD (RED MINI-MAG or RED STATION REDMAG 1.8") to your computer.

NOTE: On Mac

computers with REDCINE-X PRO

installed, RED Watchdog mounts the SSD as Read-Only

by default, which means that you are unable to write files (including firmware upgrade files) to the SSD.

Change the Mount preference to Read-Write before attempting to copy firmware to the SSD.

3. Download the most recent firmware for your DSMC from www.red.com/downloads:

‒ EPIC DRAGON Firmware: Use for any EPIC BRAIN with a RED DRAGON

or RED DRAGON MONO-

CHROME sensor.

‒ SCARLET DRAGON Firmware: Use for any SCARLET BRAIN with a RED DRAGON sensor.

‒ SCARLET Firmware: Use for any SCARLET

BRAIN with a MYSTERIUM-X

sensor.

‒ EPIC Firmware: Use for any EPIC BRAIN with a MYSTERIUM-X or MONOCHROME sensor.

4. Unzip the firmware zip file.

5. Copy the force_upgrade folder and its contents to the top level of the SSD directory.

6. Eject or unmount the SSD, and then remove the SSD.

UPGRADE DSMC

FIRMWARE

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

7. Ensure the BRAIN is turned off and the REDMOTE is undocked.

8. Insert the SSD with the force_upgrade folder into your DSMC.

9. Turn on the BRAIN.

The upgrade runs automatically.

During upgrade, the fans run at high speed and the PWR and REC LEDs flash green. After approximately

15 seconds, the LEDs stop flashing and the camera turns off. Nothing displays on the external monitors

during the upgrade.

10. After the BRAIN turns off, remove the SSD and wait 10 seconds.

11. Turn on the BRAIN.

The camera may take 30 seconds or longer to upgrade all the attached modules. During this time the PWR

and REC LEDs flash green and nothing displays on the external monitors.

12. If this is your first time upgrading firmware, a pop-up menu opens with the Software License Agreement

(SLA). Select Agree.

NOTE: If you do not agree to the SLA, the camera cannot be used. The SLA continues to display until it is

accepted.

13. Go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > System Status > Camera Info and verify that the firmware version listed

matches the firmware version that you downloaded.

14. To restore user-generated preset files to your camera, follow the instructions below:

A. Turn on the BRAIN and insert the SSD with the saved preset files into the camera.

B. Go to Menu > Presets and copy user-generated Camera Preset and Look files from the SSD to the cam-

era.

C. Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control > Overlays and copy user-generated Overlay files from

the SSD to the camera.

15. After upgrading an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON, go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Calibrate

> Sensor and black shade your camera using the Black Shading (default) option. For more information, go to

“Calibration Capture (Black Shading)” on page 112

NOTE: You must black shade an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON after upgrading it.

16. After offloading firmware upgrade files and preset files from an SSD, reformat the SSD before recording.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 174

All RED

products are designed for rugged durability, but precision instruments demand proper care. Follow the

instructions in this chapter to clean, maintain, and store RED devices.

WARNING: DO NOT rinse or immerse the DSMC

or other accessories in water. Keep dry at all times.

WARNING: DO NOT use soaps, detergents, ammonia, acetone, alkaline cleaners, abrasive cleaning compounds,

or solvents. These substances may damage lens coatings and electronic circuitry.

WARNING: DO NOT attempt to clean the sensor or optical cavity for any reason. If the sensor becomes dirty,

contact your Bomb Squad representative.

WARNING: DO NOT attempt to modify, dismantle, or open your DSMC BRAIN

, lens, or other accessory as doing

so may expose you to electric shock and serious injury. There are no user-serviceable parts inside. Alteration

or repairs made to the BRAIN, lens, or other accessory, except by a RED authorized service facility, voids the

all warranties.

BRAIN AND ACCESSORY EXTERIOR SURFACES

 Use a gas duster to clean around the top and bottom fans and other recesses on the exterior of the BRAIN.

 Clean with a dry lint-free cloth. When cleaning your BRAIN and accessories, remember that the devices are

not waterproof and moisture can damage electronic circuitry.

BRAIN AND ACCESSORY STORAGE

RED recommends that you store the BRAIN and accessories in the water-resistant cases available in the RED

Store at www.red.com/store. These cases feature laser-cut foam to keep your DSMC and accessories secure.

WARNING: DO NOT store the BRAIN or accessories in any place with extreme temperatures, direct sunlight, high

humidity, severe vibration, or strong magnetic fields.

CLEAN THE CAMERA SENSOR OR OLPF

The camera sensor and optical low-pass filter (OLPF) are EXTREMELY sensitive to dust, debris, and contamination.

As with all optical glass, any type of physical contact with the OLPF may scratch or damage the surface. RED

recommends that you clean the camera sensor or OLPF using physical contact ONLY if absolutely necessary.

ALWAYS use an air bulb to remove any particles or contaminants—such as dust—before cleaning the sensor

or OLPF with electronics swabs or wipes and cleaning solution. Cleaning the sensor or OLPF without removing

solid particles and contaminants greatly increases the risk of scratching the optical surface.

RED recommends using a Delkin Devices Digital Duster Kit (or equivalent) to clean the sensor or OLPF.

WARNING: Clean the camera sensor AT YOUR OWN RISK. The camera sensor is covered by a layer of protective

glass, but will not protect the sensor from improper care. Damage to the sensor caused by improper handling

is NOT covered under warranty. If the sensor becomes dirty, contact your Bomb Squad representative.

WARNING: Handle the DSMC Interchangeable OLPFs carefully. DO NOT touch the OLPF glass. Failure to follow

proper instructions may scratch or damage the OLPF.

DSMC

MAINTENANCE

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

LCD AND EVF SCREENS

This section explains how to clean screens on the following items:

 BOMB EVF

 RED PRO LCD

 RED Touch LCD

 DSMC Side Handle

 REDMOTE

NOTE: This section describes only how to clean screens on specific RED devices, and not how to clean the

entire device.

APPROVED SCREEN CLEANERS

Use only the following products to clean LCD and EVF screens:

 Pancro Professional Lens Cleaner (or equivalent)

 Photographic Solutions PEC*PADs (or equivalent)

 RED Microfiber Bag

PROHIBITED SCREEN CLEANERS

DO NOT use any of the items listed below to clean LCD and EVF screens. These products have not been tested

on RED products and may cause damage.

 Solvents

 Rubbing Alcohol

 Isopropyl Alcohol

 Windex

 Third-party cleaning kits

 Pre-packaged lens cleaner containing any additives, such as detergent, anti-static, fragrance, etc.

WARNING: Damage to any screens or other components of the DSMC system caused by using prohibited

cleaners is not covered under warranty.

NOTE: For more information, go to “Approved Screen Cleaners” on page 175.

SCREEN STORAGE

Store any RED device with a screen in a RED Microfiber bag. Storing devices in a RED Microfiber bag preserves

the superior quality of the specialized AR and AS coatings on the LCDs.

Hand wash and air-dry the RED Microfiber bag regularly.

WATER DAMAGE

If your device has come in contact with water or you suspect water damage, contact your Bomb Squad

representative immediately.

WARNING: DO NOT attempt to power any device that may have water damage.

WARNING: DO NOT place the device in a container of rice, silica gel, or desiccant packets in an attempt to dry

the device.

ADJUST BACK FOCUS

Adjust back focus by using the RED Focus or a focus chart. For more information about using the RED Focus,

see the RED Focus Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 176

PERFORM A STRESS TEST

Perform a stress test before important projects to ensure the reliability and stability of your gear. A stress test

subjects your DSMC

system and equipment to the increased stress of prolonged operation. If any components

are developing issues, this test will help identify those problems before you have an equipment failure during a

major shoot.

1. Configure your DSMC as desired.

2. Perform a black shade calibration (sensor calibration).

3. Enable the Sensor Test Pattern in the Maintenance menu.

4. Select the desired resolution.

5. Select the highest available frame rate.

6. Perform a secure format of the SSD.

7. Record a full SSD of footage.

8. Perform a secure format of the SSD.

9. Repeat step 6 to step 8 to test multiple SSDs.

10. If any errors occur, save a log file and submit a Technical Support request at https://support.red.com.

NOTE: Problems or dropped frames found during the stress test display as “Errors” in the bottom of the user

interface.

GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

FIRMWARE DOES NOT UPGRADE

SYMPTOM

 During an attempt to upgrade firmware, the PWR and REC LEDs flash red.

 After an attempt to upgrade firmware, the firmware version does not change.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 After downloading the firmware upgrade file, ensure that you unzip the file before saving it to the SSD.

 Ensure that the “force_upgrade” folder is saved to the top level of the SSD, and not to a subfolder.

TROUBLESHOOT

YOUR DSMC

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

“UPGRADING ATTACHED PERIPHERALS” MESSAGE

SYMPTOM

During an attempt to upgrade firmware, the display shows the message “Upgrade Attached Peripherals”. After

turning the camera off and then on, the same message displays, and then prompts you to turn off the camera.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTION

 Ensure that you are upgrading your camera to the newest firmware version.

 One (1) of your modules or lens mounts (collectively known as “peripherals”) may be experiencing issues.

Remove all peripherals (except for the SSD module), and upgrade firmware. Then attach another peripheral,

and upgrade firmware again. Repeat this process, upgrading one (1) peripheral at a time. This will identify

which peripheral is experiencing issues. If there is a peripheral that will not upgrade, submit a Technical

Support request at https://support.red.com.

PRESET COULD NOT BE APPLIED

SYMPTOM

The display shows the following message: “Preset Could Not Be Applied”.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTION

Turn off the DSMC BRAIN

, power it back up, and attempt to apply the preset that failed.

CANNOT CONTROL CAMERA EXTERNALLY

SYMPTOM

The camera displays the message “For reliable external control over Ethernet your camera’s hardware may need

to be upgraded. Please contact your Bomb Squad representative”.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

If you see this message, contact your Bomb Squad representative to have your hardware upgraded. You will

not be able to control the camera externally until the hardware is upgraded.

GENERAL: MODULE OR LENS MOUNT NOT FUNCTIONING

SYMPTOM

Module or lens mount is not functioning correctly, or is not communicating with the BRAIN.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Perform a Hardware Rediscover. For more information, go to “Rediscover (Hardware Rediscover)” on page

122.

 Upgrade your camera firmware. For more information, go to “Upgrade DSMC Firmware” on page 172.

 Perform a System Restore. For more information, go to “Restore System” on page 121.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 178

CAMERA DOES NOT RECOGNIZE LENS

SYMPTOM

The camera does not recognize the attached lens.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Ensure that the lens is compatible. For more information, go to “Lens Mounts and Lenses” on page 209.

 If using a PL lens, ensure that the BRAIN is providing power to the lens: go to Menu > Settings > Setup >

Lens and select the Enable Power to Lens check box.

 Detect the lens: go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Lens and select Detect Lens.

 Perform a Hardware Rediscover. For more information, go to “Rediscover (Hardware Rediscover)” on page

122.

CAMERA DISPLAYS N/A FOR APERTURE

SYMPTOM

The camera displays N/A for aperture when a lens is attached.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Ensure that your lens is completely locked in place.

 Remove your lens mount. Check the connection points for damage or debris. Install your lens mount.

 Perform a Hardware Rediscover. For more information, go to “Rediscover (Hardware Rediscover)” on page

122.

 Re-install your camera firmware.

 If your camera is on beta firmware, downgrade to the release build.

 If you are using a DSMC PL mount, go to Settings > Setup > Lens and ensure that power is enabled.

NOTE: Some lenses do not display the aperture information because they are incompatible. Some PL lenses do

not have i-technology data.

CAMERA CANNOT PAIR TO REDMOTE

SYMPTOM

The camera cannot pair to the REDMOTE

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Ensure REDMOTE display indicates IDLE before attempting to pair the camera to the REDMOTE.

 Ensure the REDMOTE is detached from the rear of the BRAIN and turned on.

 Ensure the REDMOTE wireless in turned on.

 Ensure display does not show the message “REDLINK Upgrade Required”.

CANNOT SEE MENUS ON LCD TOUCHSCREEN

SYMPTOM

The LCD touchscreen does not display menus.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTION

Double-tap the LCD touchscreen to exit Clean mode.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SCREEN FREEZES OR DOES NOT DISPLAY

SYMPTOM

The screen freezes or does not display.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTION

Perform a Hard Restore. For more information, go to “Perform a Hard Restore” on page 181.

LCD FLICKER

SYMPTOM

The LCD or monitor is flickering.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Go to Menu > Settings > Display > Monitor Control and adjust the Frequency to 60 Hz.

 Use a different cable.

 Ensure cables are properly attached.

CANNOT USE TOUCHSCREEN OR DSMC SIDE HANDLE

SYMPTOM

Cannot control the camera via the touchscreen or the DSMC Side Handle.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Perform a Hard Restore. For more information, go to “Perform a Hard Restore” on page 181.

 If you are using an HD-SDI or HDMI

monitor, enable menus on the monitors and control the camera via

the DSMC Side Handle:

A. Connect an SSD (RED MINI-MAG

or RED STATION REDMAG 1.8") to your computer.

NOTE: On Mac

computers with REDCINE-X PRO

installed, RED Watchdog mounts the SSD as Read-

Only by default, which means that you are unable to write files (including firmware upgrade files) to the

SSD. Change the Mount preference to Read-Write before attempting to copy firmware to the SSD.

B. On the SSD, create a new folder, and name it force_preset.

C. Download the DSMC Toolkit from www.red.com/downloads.

D. Open the Preset_Files folder.

E. Open the folder that corresponds to the firmware version you are using.

F. Save the appropriate enable_menus file to the force_preset folder on your SSD.

G. Eject or unmount the SSD, and then remove the SSD.

H. Ensure the BRAIN is turned off and the REDMOTE is undocked.

I. Insert the SSD into your DSMC.

J. Turn on the BRAIN.

The camera automatically applies the preset.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 180

“CRITICAL FAILURE” OR “SERIOUS ERROR” MESSAGES

SYMPTOM

When you upgrade or turn on the camera, the display shows a message with the phrase “Critical Failure” or

“Serious Error”.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Update the camera firmware to the latest release build available for download at www.red.com/downloads.

 Submit a Technical Support request at https://support.red.com. Include the following with the request:

‒ Log file. For more information, go to “Save a LOG File” on page 110.

‒ List of modules, lens, and third-party accessories that were attached when the error occurred.

‒ Method for powering the camera when the error occurred (include battery types, power modules, and

power cables).

ERROR 0X00000020

SYMPTOM

The display shows a message with the phrase “Error 0x00000020. Please save log and send to RED support.”

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Perform a secure format of the SSD. For more information, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide, available

at www.red.com/downloads.

 Update the camera firmware to the latest release build available for download at www.red.com/downloads.

 Submit a Technical Support request at https://support.red.com. Include the following with the request:

‒ Log file. For more information, go to “Save a LOG File” on page 110.

‒ List of modules, lens, and third-party accessories that were attached when the error occurred.

‒ Method for powering the camera when the error occurred (include battery types, power modules, and

power cables).

TIGHTEN DC IN CONNECTOR

SYMPTOM

The DC IN connector nut is loose.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

Tighten the loose DC IN connector nut using a pair of heavy duty strong point tweezers.

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

OPTIONAL: Add a small amount of Loctite

222 (low strength thread locker) to the threads of the DC IN connector

nut to prevent the connector from becoming loose again.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

CAMERA DOES NOT TURN ON

SYMPTOM

The camera does not turn on (does not boot up), even when powered.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Remove all accessories and power the BRAIN using the AC Power Adaptor.

 Perform a Hard Restore. For more information, go to “Perform a Hard Restore” on page 181.

 Update the camera firmware to the latest release build available for download at www.red.com/downloads.

PERFORM A HARD RESTORE

A common way to resolve camera firmware issues is to perform a Hard Restore. A Hard Restore functions like

a System Restore in that it changes all settings to the factory default values.

To perform a Hard Restore, follow the instructions below:

1. With the BRAIN turned off, hold the PWR/REC button on the BRAIN for 20 seconds or until the fans turn at

a high speed.

2. Release the PWR/REC button.

The screen displays correctly.

NOTE: User key settings will be reset as well as any other changes from the default settings. The REDMOTE will

also require pairing to communicate wirelessly with the BRAIN.

IMAGE APPEARS GRAINY

SYMPTOM

Image or footage appears grainy.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Perform a black shading calibration before recording additional clips. For more information, go to “Sensor

Calibration” on page 111.

 Check the histogram to ensure proper exposure. Noise occurs if an image is overexposed or underexposed.

For more information, go to “Stills Mode” on page 58.

 Use the lowest REDCODE

compression possible for the settings you have selected. For more information,

go to “REDCODE” on page 55.

 Use a higher resolution.

 If you have the DSMC Interchangeable OLPF system installed, verify that you have the correct OLPF

selected in the OLPF menu. For more information, go to “Verify Installed OLPF” on page 48.

 Use Adaptive fan mode to regulate the camera temperature. Noise occurs when the temperature from the

applied calibration map is not in sync.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 182

POLARIZER AFFECTS IMAGE

SYMPTOM

The image has a faint vertical rainbow artifact.

EXPLANATION

When using a polarizer with an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON (with either a Skin Tone-Highlight or a

Low Light Optimized OLPF), a faint vertical rainbow artifact might appear on the image. This artifact is not

exclusive to EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON cameras, and can occur on other cameras depending upon

camera orientation and direction of the polarized light. The rainbow artifact is caused by a complex interaction

between the scene lighting, lens, polarizer, OLPF, and the camera.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Reorient the polarizer or the camera.

 Avoid using a polarizer.

BLACK AND WHITE IMAGE

SYMPTOM

The display shows that an image is in black and white, and the menus are still in color.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Go to Menu > Settings > Look > Color, and check the Saturation setting. If the Saturation setting is set to a

low value, change the Saturation to a higher value.

 Perform a System Restore. For more information, go to “Restore System” on page 121.

INCORRECT COLOR TEMPERATURE

SYMPTOM

The camera color temperature is off and the image looks warmer or cooler than normal.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Perform an auto white-balance. For more information, go to “Color Temperature” on page 84.

 Perform a black shade calibration. For more information, go to “Calibrate” on page 111.

 If you have the DSMC Interchangeable OLPF system installed, verify that you have the correct OLPF

selected in the OLPF menu. For more information, go to “Verify Installed OLPF” on page 48.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

TIMECODE OR GENLOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION

SYMPTOM

The SYNC, GEN, and/or TC light is red, yellow, or grayed out.

POTENTIAL RESOLUTIONS

 Ensure your timecode or genlock device is compatible. For more information, go to “Compatible Devices”

on page 171.

 Use a different cable.

 Ensure your timecode or genlock device settings match your project settings.

 Ensure your timecode or genlock device is set to the correct source. For more information, go to “Timecode”

on page 158 or “Genlock” on page 161.

 Ensure that your Sensor Sync Mode is set to Genlock. For more information, go to “Sensor Sync” on page

162.

 If you are using an Ambient device, set the ACN (Ambient Clockit Network) to Off.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 184

EPIC DRAGON

EPIC DRAGON TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

Sensor 19 megapixel RED DRAGON

sensor

Pixel Array 6144 (h) x 3160 (v)

S/N Ratio 80 dB

Dynamic Range 16.5+ stops

Max Image Area 6144 (h) x 3160 (v)

Lens Coverage 30.7mm (h) x 15.8mm (v) x 34.5 mm (d)

Max Depth of Field Equivalent to S35mm (Motion)/APS-H (Still) lenses

Acquisition Formats Go to “EPIC DRAGON Formats” on page 92 for a full list

Project Frame Rates 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 47.96, 48, 50, 59.94 FPS, all resolutions

Delivery Formats 4K : DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

2K : DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2 : Quicktime

, JPEG

Avid AAF, MXF. 1080p 4.2.0, 720p 4:2:0 : H.264,.MP4

Program Output 3G-SDI (HD-SDI) Clean Feed

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Monitor Output

3G-SDI (HD-SDI) and HDMI with Frame Guides and Lookaround

1080p, 720p, 480p

: RGB or 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Digital Media REDMAG™ 1.8" SSD: 48GB, 64GB, 128GB, 256GB, 512GB

RED MINI-MAG

: 120GB, 240GB, 512GB, 1TB

REDCODE To see all of the maximum available REDCODE

values, see the DSMC Media

Operation Guide at www.red.com/downloads

Audio 2 channel, uncompressed, 24 bit, 48KHz

Optional 4 channel, and AES/EBU digital audio

Remote Control REDLINK

Wireless, Ethernet, RS232, GPI Trigger

Weight 5 lbs (body only)

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

EPIC DRAGON TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

Construction Aluminum Alloy

Operating Temperature Range 0˚C to 40˚C (32˚F to 104˚F)

Storage Temperature Range –20˚C to 50˚C (–4˚F to 122˚F)

1. 480p is available for HDMI only.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 186

SCARLET DRAGON

SCARLET DRAGON TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

Sensor 19 megapixel RED DRAGON sensor

Pixel Array 6144 (h) x 3160 (v)

S/N Ratio 80 dB

Dynamic Range 16.5+ stops

Max Image Area 6144 (h) x 3160 (v)

Lens Coverage 30.7mm (h) x 15.8mm (v) x 34.5 mm (d)

Max Depth of Field Equivalent to S35mm (Motion)/APS-H (Still) lenses

Acquisition Formats

6K RAW (Full Frame, 6:5)

5K RAW (Full Frame, 2:1, WS, HD, 6:5)

4K RAW (Full Frame, 2:1, WS, HD, 6:5)

3K RAW (Full Frame, 2:1, WS, HD, 6:5)

2K RAW (Full Frame, 2:1, WS, HD, 6:5)

Project Frame Rates 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 47.96, 48, 50, 59.94 FPS, all resolutions

Delivery Formats 4K: DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

2K: DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2 : Quicktime, JPEG

Avid AAF, MXF. 1080p 4.2.0, 720p 4:2:0 : H.264,.MP4

Program Output 3G-SDI (HD-SDI) Clean Feed

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Monitor Output

3G-SDI (HD-SDI) and HDMI with Frame Guides and Lookaround

1080p, 720p, 480p

: RGB or 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Digital Media REDMAG 1.8" SSD: 48GB, 64GB, 128GB, 240GB, 256GB, 512GB

RED MINI-MAG: 120GB, 240GB, 512GB, 1TB

Maximum Frames

Per Second (FPS)

6K FF: 12 FPS (in Burst mode)

5K FF: 48 FPS

4K FF: 60 FPS

3K FF: 80 FPS

2K FF: 120 FPS

5K WS: 60 FPS

4K WS: 75 FPS

3K WS: 100 FPS

2K WS: 150 FPS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SCARLET DRAGON TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

Audio 2 channel, uncompressed, 24 bit, 48KHz

Optional 4 channel, and AES/EBU digital audio

Remote Control REDLINK Wireless, Ethernet, RS232, GPI Trigger

Weight 5 lbs (body only)

Construction Aluminum Alloy

Operating Temperature Range 0˚C to 40˚C (32˚F to 104˚F)

Storage Temperature Range –20˚C to 50˚C (–4˚F to 122˚F)

1. Go to “SCARLET DRAGON Formats” on page 95 for a full list.

2. 480p is available for HDMI only.

3. To see all of the maximum available REDCODE values, see the DSMC Media Operation Guide at www.red.com/downloads.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 188

EPIC MYSTERIUM-X

EPIC MYSTERIUM-X TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

Sensor 14 megapixel MYSTERIUM-X

sensor

Pixel Array 5120 (h) x 2700 (v)

S/N Ratio 66 dB

Dynamic Range 13.5 stops, up to 18 stops with HDRx

Max Image Area 5120 (h) x 2700 (v)

Lens Coverage 27.7mm (h) x 14.6mm (v) x 31.4 mm (d)

Max Depth of Field Equivalent to S35mm (Motion)/APS-H (Still) lenses

Equivalent to 16mm (Motion) lens in 2K RAW

Acquisition Formats Go to “EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X Formats” on page

96 for a full list

Project Frame Rates 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 47.96, 48, 50, 59.94 FPS, all resolutions

Delivery Formats 4K : DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

2K : DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2 : Quicktime, JPEG

Avid AAF, MXF. 1080p 4.2.0, 720p 4:2:0 : H.264,.MP4

Program Output 3G-SDI (HD-SDI) Clean Feed

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Monitor Output

3G-SDI (HD-SDI) and HDMI with Frame Guides and Lookaround

1080p, 720p, 480p

: RGB or 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Digital Media REDMAG 1.8" SSD: 48GB, 64GB, 128GB, 256GB, 512GB

RED MINI-MAG: 120GB, 240GB, 512GB, 1TB

REDCODE To see all of the maximum available REDCODE values, see the DSMC Media

Operation Guide at www.red.com/downloads

Audio 2 channel, uncompressed, 24 bit, 48KHz

Optional 4 channel, and AES/EBU digital audio

Remote Control REDLINK Wireless, Ethernet, RS232, GPI Trigger

Weight 5 lbs (body only)

Construction Aluminum Alloy

Operating Temperature Range 0˚C to 40˚C (32˚F to 104˚F)

Storage Temperature Range –20˚C to 50˚C (–4˚F to 122˚F)

1. 480p is available for HDMI only.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X

SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

Sensor 14 megapixels MYSTERIUM-X sensor

Pixel Array 5120 (h) x 2700 (v)

S/N Ratio 66 dB

Dynamic Range 13.5 stops, up to 18 stops with HDRx

6 FPS with 5K Full Frame and HDRx

15 FPS with 4K HD and HDRx

Max Image Area 5120 (h) x 2700 (v)

Lens Coverage 27.7mm (h) x 14.6mm (v) = 31.4 mm (d)

Max Depth of Field Equivalent to S35mm (Motion)/APS-H (Still) lenses

Equivalent to 16mm (Motion) lens in 2K RAW

Acquisition Formats Go to “EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X Formats” on page

96 for a full list

Project Frame Rates 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 47.96, 48, 50, 59.94 FPS, all resolutions

Delivery Formats 4K : DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

2K : DPX, TIFF, OpenEXR (.RED via RRencode Plugin)

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2 : Quicktime, JPEG

Avid AAF, MXF. 1080p 4.2.0, 720p 4:2:0 : H.264,.MP4

Program Output 3G-SDI (HD-SDI) Clean Feed

1080p RGB or 4:2:2, 720p 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Monitor Output

3G-SDI (HD-SDI) and HDMI with Frame Guides and Lookaround

1080p, 720p, 480p

: RGB or 4:2:2

SMPTE Timecode, HANC Metadata, 24-bit 48Khz Audio

Digital Media REDMAG 1.8" SSD: 48GB, 64GB, 128GB, 256GB, 512GB

RED MINI-MAG: 120GB, 240GB, 512GB, 1TB

REDCODE To see all of the maximum available REDCODE values, see the DSMC Media

Operation Guide at www.red.com/downloads

Audio 2 channel, uncompressed, 24 bit, 48KHz

Optional 4 channel, and AES/EBU digital audio

Remote Control REDLINK Wireless, Ethernet, RS232, GPI Trigger

Weight 5 lbs (body only)

Construction Aluminum Alloy

Color Battleship Gray BRAIN

Body

Black Canon

Mount and SIDE SSD

All DSMC

Modules Black

Operating Temperature Range 0˚C to 40˚C (32˚F to 104˚F)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 190

SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION

Storage Temperature Range –20˚C to 50˚C (–4˚F to 122˚F)

1. 480p is available for HDMI only.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

BRAIN DIMENSIONS

NOTE: Dimensions are shown in mm.

EPIC BRAIN DIMENSIONS

FRONT VIEW

98.00

147.00

137.00

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 192

SIDE VIEW

27.81

112.00

115.85

89.90

32.14

7.40

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

TOP VIEW

102.00

112.00

144.14

147.99

27.00

4X 9.00

5X 1/4-20 THREAD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 194

BOTTOM VIEW

2X 3/8-16 THREAD

1/4-20 THREAD

44.80

55.50

80.50

93.00

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

BACK VIEW

20.50

77.50

122.00

49.00

4X M4 THREAD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 196

SCARLET BRAIN DIMENSIONS

FRONT VIEW

93.36

137.00

140.00

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

SIDE VIEW

27.81

115.90

112.00

89.90

32.14

7.40

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 198

TOP VIEW

148.04

144.14

112.00

102.00

28.65

4X 9.00

5X 1/4-20 THREAD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

BOTTOM VIEW

46.65

55.50

80.50

93.00

2X 3/8-16 THREAD

1/4-20 THREAD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 200

BACK VIEW

18.15

75.15

49.00

122.00

4X M4 THREAD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 201

This appendix provides pinout information for the input/output connectors on the RED

BRAIN

NOTE: When connecting a cable to a connector, align the key and red marker on the cable connector with the

corresponding key and marker on the device connection.

NOTE: Connector diagram images are for reference only. Diagrams are not to scale.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

DSMC Connectors

INPUT/OUTPUT

CONNECTORS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 202

# CONNECTOR CONNECTOR TYPE FOR MORE INFORMATION, GO TO...

1 REDMOTE Dock 8-point POGO “REDMOTE Operation” on page 148

2 Module Power SEARAY “Power Inputs” on page 35

3 HD-SDI BNC “3G-SDI (HD-SDI) Out” on page 202

4 HDMI HDMI “HDMI Out” on page 203

5 Headphone Jack 3.5mm stereo “Headphone” on page 207

6 SYNC 4-pin 00B LEMO

“SYNC (Video Sync In)” on page 203

7 CTRL 4-pin 00B LEMO “CTRL (RS232 Control)” on page 205

8 GIG-E 9-pin 0B LEMO “DC IN (Power Input)” on page 208

9 DC IN 6-pin 1B LEMO “DC IN (Power Input)” on page 208

N/A MIC-1, MIC-2 (Front) 3.5 mm stereo “SSD Module Connectors” on page 208

RECORD/MONITOR OUT PORTS

3G-SDI (HD-SDI) OUT

A standard 75 ohm BNC connector provides the following output:

 Broadcast specification 3G-SDI (HD-SDI) video output (default mode is Clean)

 Two (2) channels of embedded audio

 Time of Day and Edge timecode

 Record Tally flag

 Clip name information (as SMPTE RP-188 VITC2 HANC metadata)

For more information, go to “Monitor” on page 73.

The 3G-SDI (HD-SDI) output provides the formats described in the table below:

3G-SDI (HD-SDI) OUTPUT FORMATS

VIDEO FEED

FREQUENCY (HZ)

SMPTE STANDARD

720p 23.98, 24.00, 25.00, 29.97, 30.00, 50.00, 59.94 SMPTE ST 292-1 (1.485 Gbps)

1080p 10-bit 4:2:2 23.98, 24.00, 25.00, 29.97, 30.00 SMPTE ST 292 (1.485 Gbps)

1080p 10-bit 4:2:2 50.00, 59.94, 60.00 3G-SDI

SMPTE ST 424 (2.970 Gbps)

SMPTE ST 425 (2.970 Gbps)

1. Ensure you select a frequency supported by your monitor.

2. The output is progressive scan (p); it does not support progressive segmented frame (PsF) or interlaced (i) scan formats.

3. The frequency options depend on project time base. If you have a non-drop frame project time base (such as 24.00), you can select

only non-drop frame frequencies. If you have a drop frame project time base (such as 23.98), you can select only drop frame frequencies.

75 OHM BNC CONNECTOR

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION DIRECTION

Center 3G-SDI SMPTE ST 424 Out

Shield/Screen GROUND Camera ground N/A

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

COMPATIBLE CABLE

 790-0341: RED

HD-SDI Cable (6')

HDMI OUT

A standard HDMI connector provides the following output:

 High-definition video output (default mode is Overlay)

 Two (2) channels of embedded audio

The HDMI output provides the formats described in the table below:

HDMI OUTPUT FORMATS

VIDEO FEED

FREQUENCY (HZ)

480p 50.00, 60.00

720p 24.00, 25.00, 30.00, 50.00, 60.00

1080p 24.00, 25.00, 30.00, 50.00, 60.00

1. Ensure you select a frequency supported by your monitor.

2. The HDMI output is progressive scan (p); it does not support progressive segmented frame (PsF) or interlaced (i) scan formats.

COMPATIBLE CABLE

 790-0331: RED HDMI Cable (5')

COMMUNICATION PORTS

SYNC (VIDEO SYNC IN)

The 4-pin 00B LEMO SYNC connector accepts timecode, genlock, and General Purpose Input (GPI) signals.

4-PIN 00B LEMO SYNC CONNECTOR

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION DIRECTION

1 GROUND Common ground N/A

2 SS/GPI Shutter sync/general purpose input trigger In

3 TIMECODE SMPTE unbalanced timecode input In

4 GENLOCK Tri-level sync input In

NOTE: Mating connector is FGG.00.304.CLAD27Z.

Front Face of the SYNC (Video Sync)

Connector (Looking at the DSMC)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 204

SYNC TRIGGER BUTTON CIRCUIT

The SYNC connector has a 3.3 V Schmitt trigger (5 V tolerant). The trigger is not a switch closure circuit, so it

requires that the trigger source supplies current. Both edges of the input signal may be used as a trigger.

For example, this is the behavior of the circuit when the GPI trigger is used for record start/stop:

 Start Record: On ground to 3.3 V transition

 During Record: Hold at 3.3 V

 Stop Record: On 3.3 V to ground transition

 During Stop: Hold at ground

Input Voltage:

3.3 V to 5.0 V

100 ohm

1/4 W

On when output

signal is high

10 uF

electrolytic

10 V min.

Female

BNC

Push to make/break

button/toggle

Batteries:

2x AA or AAA

3x AA or AAA

1.7 V, 20 mA

68 ohm

1/4 W

NOTE: In the diagram above, values are approximate. Use standard values.

COMPATIBLE CABLES

 790-0154: 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable

 790-0187: 4-Pin 00 LEMO-to-Flying Lead

 790-0415: RED Start/Stop Cable (14-Pin LEMO to SYNC, CTRL, BNC)

 790-0428: RED Start/Stop Cable (14-Pin to 00B SYNC)

Trigger Button

Circuit Diagram

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

CTRL (RS232 CONTROL)

The 4-pin 00B LEMO CTRL connector supports RS232 remote control for 3D camera communication and third-

party metadata ingest applications. For more information, go to “BRAIN GPIO” on page 108.

The General Purpose Out (GPO) tally presents 3.3 V at a maximum of 0.04 A between pins 1 and 3. When used

as a record tally, the rising edge of the pulse indicates start of record, falling edge represents end of record.

For more information about controlling the camera via RS232, download the REDLINK

SDK, available at www.

red.com/developers.

4-PIN 00B LEMO CTRL CONNECTOR

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION DIRECTION

1 GROUND Common ground N/A

2 232 RX RS232 RX In

3 SS/GPO Shutter sync/general purpose output Out

4 232 TX RS232 TX Out

NOTE: Mating connector is FGG.00.304.CLAD27Z.

COMPATIBLE CABLES

 790-0154: 3BNC-to-00 LEMO Sync Cable

 790-0187: 4-Pin 00 LEMO-to-Flying Lead

 790-0415: RED Start/Stop Cable (14-Pin LEMO to SYNC, CTRL, BNC)

Front Face of the CTRL (RS232)

Connector (Looking at the DSMC)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 206

GIG-E (ETHERNET)

The GIG-E 9-pin 0B LEMO connector provides a 1000BASE-T (IEEE 802.3ab) gigabit Ethernet connection for

remote camera setup, master/slave camera communication, and external metadata ingest. Since the GIG-E

connector does not support slower speeds (10BASE-T and 100BASE-T), ensure that any device you connect

to supports 1000BASE-T.

9-PIN 0B LEMO GIG-E CONNECTOR

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION DIRECTION

1 BI_DC + Data pair C+ N/A

2 BI_DC - Data pair C- N/A

3 BI_DD+ Data pair D+ N/A

4 BI_DD - Data pair D- N/A

5 BI_DA- Data pair A- N/A

6 BI_DA+ Data pair A+ N/A

7 BI_DB+ Data pair B+ N/A

8 BI_DB- Data pair B- N/A

9 N/A Do not connect N/A

NOTE: Mating connector is FGG.0B.309.CLAD32Z.

COMPATIBLE CABLES

 790-0159: LEMO-to-CAT5E Ethernet Cable (9')

 790-0163: Master/Slave Gig-E Cable (4')

Front Face of the GIG-E Connector

(Looking at the Camera)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

AUDIO PORTS

MIC-1, MIC-2 (MICROPHONE AUDIO)

The two (2) 3.5mm microphone jacks are microphone level analog audio inputs. Each jack has 2.4K ohm of

nominal impedance. For more information, go to “Record and Monitor Audio” on page 141.

 MIC-1: Ch1

 MIC-2: Ch2

MICROPHONE JACK

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION DIRECTION

TIP IN + Mic input (+48V phantom power, optional) In

RING IN - Mic Input (+48V phantom power, optional) In

SLEEVE GND Camera ground N/A

COMPATIBLE CABLE

 790-0229: XLR Microphone Cable (20”)

HEADPHONE

The 3.5mm stereo jack provides two (2) channels of audio for monitoring. For maximum quality, use high

impedance headphones.

HEADPHONE JACK

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION DIRECTION

TIP LEFT Left channel audio Out

RING RIGHT Right channel audio Out

SLEEVE GND Camera ground N/A

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 208

POWER PORTS

DC IN (POWER INPUT)

The 6-pin 1B LEMO connector accepts DC input power from 11.5 V DC to 17 V DC. A built-in power conditioner

protects against reverse-polarity connections, electrostatic discharge (ESD), undervoltage, overvoltage, and

overcurrent.

WARNING: Both pairs of +VBATT and GROUND pins must be wired. Using a third-party power cable that wires

only one (1) pair of +VBATT and GROUND pins may damage the power supply or the DSMC. Damage to the

power supply or other components of the DSMC system caused by using an inappropriate power cable is not

covered under warranty.

6-PIN 1B DC INPUT CONNECTOR

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 +VBATT Power input, +11.5 to +17 V DC

2 +VBATT Power input, +11.5 to +17 V DC

3 SCL-BATT Serial battery bus clock

4 GROUND Power return (camera ground)

5 GROUND Power return (camera ground)

6 SDA-BATT Serial battery bus data

NOTE: Mating connector is FGJ.1B.306.CWLD72Z.

COMPATIBLE CABLES

 790-0138: 2B-to-1B LEMO Power Adaptor Cable

 790-0164: XLR Power Cable (10')

 790-0165: XLR Power Cable (30")

SSD MODULE CONNECTORS

The connectors for the side SSD modules and the REAR SSD MODULE are described in the RED DSMC Media

Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

Front Face of the DC In Power Input

Connector (Looking at the DSMC)

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 209

LENS MOUNTS

This section describes DSMC

lens mounts. DSMC mounts may be configured with 19mm rods to accommodate

most cinematography lenses, matte boxes, and follow focus systems.

DSMC MOTION MOUNTS

The RED MOTION MOUNT

is a revolutionary and adjustable lens mount system for your DSMC. By integrating

a global shutter, temporal anti-aliasing soft shutter, and variable neutral density (ND) system into a single

lens mount, the MOTION MOUNT delivers on-the-fly shutter adjustments to reduce motion blur and temporal

aliasing. The ND filter also includes a linear polarizer and IR filter for improved image color and contrast.

For more information, see the MOTION MOUNT Operation Guide, available at www.red.com/downloads.

NOTE: HDRx is not available while the MOTION MOUNT is installed.

LENS MOUNTS

AND LENSES

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 210

REMOVE A LENS MOUNT

NOTE: You can change lens mounts in the field. However, RED

recommends that you change lens mounts only

in a dust-free environment.

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX

driver

1. Turn off the DSMC.

2. Attach the DSMC to a stable platform or position the DSMC on a clean and level work surface so that the

lens mount screws are accessible.

3. Remove the lens and any DSMC modules, cables, or other accessories that might interfere with removing

the lens mount.

4. If removing the

5. Loosen and remove the four (4) M4x0.7 x 8 mm lens mount screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a

T20 TORX driver.

NOTE: Screw removal may require a large handle T20 TORX driver and additional leverage.

6. Remove the lens mount from the DSMC.

Remove the lens mount screws

Remove the lens mount

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

INSTALL A LENS MOUNT

NOTE: You can change lens mounts in the field. However, RED recommends that you change lens mounts only

in a dust-free environment.

REQUIRED TOOL: T20 TORX driver

1. Ensure that the DSMC is turned off and remove any accessories or cables that may interfere with installation.

2. Inspect the gold electrical contact pins on the front of the DSMC and the gold contact pads on the rear of

the lens mount to ensure that they are free of any contamination.

3. Align the lens mount on the front of the DSMC BRAIN. The DSMC connection pins must align with the lens

mount pins.

4. If installing the

5. Replace and loosely tighten the four (4) M4x0.7 x 8 mm lens mount screws in a cross pattern (“X” pattern)

using a T20 TORX driver.

WARNING: DO NOT FULLY TIGHTEN.

6. Tighten the four (4) lens mount screws evenly in a cross pattern (“X” pattern) using a T20 TORX driver. DO

NOT exceed 350 in-oz, or damage may occur.

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

7. After installation, a hardware rediscover or firmware upgrade may be required, particularly if you are installing

a MOTION MOUNT. If a MOTION MOUNT is not recognized, you will be unable to access the Motion Mount

menu at Menu > Settings > Setup > Lens.

To perform a hardware rediscover, go to Menu > Settings > Maintenance > Rediscover. A system reboot is

required after a hardware rediscover.

NOTE: If you need to replace any screws, please contact your Bomb Squad representative.

Align lens mount pins

Tighten screws

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 212

LENSES

This section describes lenses and lens operations for the DSMC system.

WARNING: All lenses are hot swappable. However, lens mounts are NOT HOT SWAPPABLE, meaning you cannot

remove or install lens mounts while the camera is turned on. Before installing or removing lens mounts, you

MUST turn off the camera. Failure to do so may result in damage to the lens mounts or DSMC that will not be

covered under warranty.

LENS WEIGHT AND LENS SUPPORT

Use a lens support system when mounting heavy or long lenses to your camera.

When mounting a heavy or long lens, ensure that the full weight of the lens is never directly on the camera or

lens mount. Mount the lens to the support system first, and then carefully mount the lens to the camera.

Due to the lightweight construction of the carbon fiber BRAIN and magnesium mounts, most setups with the

carbon fiber BRAIN require a lens support system for all but the lightest lenses.

WARNING: Failure to use lens supports appropriate for the lens and camera setup may lead to damage of the

DSMC and lens mount. Any damage caused by not using a lens support system will not be covered under

warranty.

POSITIVE LOCK (PL) LENSES

This section describes the appropriate method for attaching and detaching PL lenses. For more information,

refer to the original manufacturer’s instructions. This section also lists lenses supported by the DSMC PL

mounts.

WARNING: ALWAYS protect your equipment, when it is not in use, by replacing lens caps and mount caps.

ATTACH PL LENSES

1. Rotate the locking ring counter-clockwise to release the DSMC mount cap.

2. Remove the rear lens cap and the DSMC mount cap.

3. Align the key and contact pads (if present) on the PL lens with the key and connector pins on the DSMC

PL mount.

4. Insert the lens into the DSMC PL mount.

5. Rotate the locking ring clockwise to secure the lens in place.

DETACH PL LENSES

1. Rotate the locking ring counter-clockwise to release the PL lens.

2. Remove the PL lens from the DSMC PL mount.

3. Replace the rear lens cap and DSMC mount cap when the lens is not in use.

DSMC PL MOUNT SUPPORTED LENSES

The DSMC Mg PL Mount 2.0, DSMC TI PL Mount, and the RED MOTION MOUNT Ti PL are compatible with

most standard PL mount cinema lenses and devices. For information about the compatibility of the RED

MOTION MOUNT Ti PL, see the MOTION MOUNT Operation Guide at www.red.com/downloads.

WARNING: Using a non-standard PL mount lens or device with a DSMC PL mount may damage the DSMC and

lens mount. Any damage caused by not using a standard PL mount lens or device will not be covered under

warranty.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

FUJINON T2.9 CABRIO PREMIER PL LENSES

NOTE: The VTR switch on the lens is mapped to Record: Toggle by default. The VTR switch can be mapped to

another key.

The following Fujinon

T2.9 Cabrio Premier PL lenses are compatible with all DSMC PL mounts, but must be

powered externally and configured a specific way:

 Fujinon 14-35mm T2.9 Cabrio Premier PL

 Fujinon 19-90mm T2.9 Cabrio Premier PL

To set up the Fujinon T2.9 Cabrio Premier PL lenses, follow the instructions below. Refer to the manufacturer’s

operation manual for detailed information about setting up and using the lens.

1. Attach the lens to the DSMC PL mount.

2. On the lens, set the Camera Communication switch to On.

3. On the lens, set the LDS, /i Select switch to Off.

4. Connect an external power source to the lens.

5. Go to Menu > Settings > Setup > Lens.

6. Deselect the Enable Power to Lens check box.

NOTE: This option is only available when a DSMC PL mount is attached to the DSMC.

7. The lens should be successfully connected. However, if lens data does not display within 10 seconds, go

to Menu > Settings > Setup > Lens and select Detect Lens.

CANON EF LENSES

This section describes the appropriate method for attaching and detaching Canon

EF lenses. For more

information, refer to the original manufacturer’s instructions. This section also lists lenses supported by the

DSMC Canon EF Mount.

WARNING: ALWAYS protect your equipment, when it is not in use, by replacing lens caps and mount caps.

ATTACH CANON EF LENSES

1. Rotate the secondary locking ring counter-clockwise to disengage.

2. Press the lens release button and rotate the lens cap counter-clockwise to remove the DSMC mount cap.

3. Remove the rear lens cap.

4. Align the red dot on the lens with the red dot on the DSMC Canon Mount and position the lens in the mount.

5. Turn the lens clockwise until it clicks into place.

6. Rotate the secondary locking ring clockwise to engage.

DETACH CANON EF LENSES

1. Rotate the secondary locking ring counter-clockwise to disengage.

2. Press and hold the lens release button. While holding the lens release button, turn the lens counterclockwise

until it stops and remove it from the DSMC mount.

3. Replace the rear lens cap and DSMC mount cap when the lens is not in use.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 214

DSMC CANON MOUNT SUPPORTED LENSES

The DSMC Canon Mount and DSMC Canon MOTION MOUNT electronically support the following lenses:

COMPATIBLE LENS TYPE FOCAL LENGTH

Canon EF Canon EF 14mm f/2.8L II USM

Canon EF 15mm f/2.8 Fisheye

Canon EF 16-35mm f/2.8L II

Canon EF 17-40mm f/4L

Canon EF 20mm f/2.8 USM

Canon EF 24mm f/1.4L II

Canon EF 24mm f/2.8

Canon EF 24mm f/2.8 IS USM

Canon EF 24-70mm f/2.8L

Canon EF 24-70mm f/2.8L II USM

Canon EF 24-70mm f/4L IS USM

Canon EF 24-105mm f/4L IS

Canon EF 28mm f/1.8 USM

Canon EF 28mm f/2.8

Canon EF 28mm f/2.8 IS USM

Canon EF 28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS

Canon EF 35mm f/1.4L

Canon EF 35mm f/2

Canon EF 35mm f/2.0 IS USM

Canon EF 50mm f/1.2L

Canon EF 50mm f/1.4 USM

Canon EF 50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro

Canon EF 70-200mm f/2.8L IS

Canon EF 70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

Canon EF 70-200mm f/2.8L USM

Canon EF 70-200mm f/4L

Canon EF 70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM

Canon EF 70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS

Canon EF 70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM

Canon EF 85mm f/1.2L II

Canon EF 85mm f/1.8 USM

Canon EF 100mm f/2.0 USM

Canon EF 100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM

Canon EF 100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS

Canon EF 135mm f/2.0L

Canon EF 135mm f/2.8 Soft Focus

Canon EF 180mm f/3.5L Macro

Canon EF 200mm f/2.0L IS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

COMPATIBLE LENS TYPE FOCAL LENGTH

Canon EF Canon EF 200mm f/2.8L II

Canon EF 200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x

Canon EF 300mm f/2.8L IS

Canon EF 300mm f/2.8L IS II USM

Canon EF 300mm f/2.8L IS II USM with 1.4x III Extender

Canon EF 300mm f/2.8L IS II USM with 2x III Extender

Canon EF 300mm f/4L IS

Canon EF 400mm f/2.8 IS II USM

Canon EF 400mm f/2.8L IS

Canon EF 400mm f/2.8L IS with 1.4x Extender

Canon EF 400mm f/2.8L IS with 2x Extender

Canon EF 400mm f/4.0 DO IS

Canon EF 400mm f/5.6L

Canon EF 500mm f/4L IS

Canon EF 500mm f/4L IS USM

Canon EF 500mm f/4L IS with 1.4x Extender

Canon EF 500mm f/4L IS with 2x Extender

Canon EF 500 f/4L IS II USM

Canon EF 600mm f/4L IS

Canon EF 600mm f/4L IS II USM

Canon EF 800mm f/5.6L IS

Canon EF-S Canon EF-S 10-22mm f/3.5-4.5 USM

Canon EF-S 15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM

Canon EF-S 17-55mm f/2.8 IS USM

Canon EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

Canon EF-S 60mm f/2.8 Macro USM

Sigma Sigma 10-20mm f/3.5 EX DC HSM

Sigma 15mm f/2.8 EX DG Diagonal Fisheye

Sigma 17-70mm f/2.8-4 DC Macro OS HSM

Sigma 18-35mm DC HSM

Sigma 20mm f/1.8 EX DG ASP RF

Sigma 24mm f/1.8 EX DG ASP Macro AF

Sigma 24-70mm f/2.8 IF EX DG HSM

Sigma 28mm f/1.8 EX DG ASP Macro AF

Sigma 50mm f/1.4 EX DG HSM

Sigma 85mm f/1.4 EX DG HSM

Sigma APO Sigma APO 120-300mm f/2.8 EX DG OS HSM

Sigma APO 180mm f/2.8 Macro EX DG OS HSM

Tamron Tamron SP 10-24mm f/3.5-4.5 Di II

Tamron SP 24-70mm f/2.8 Di VC USD

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 216

COMPATIBLE LENS TYPE FOCAL LENGTH

Tokina Tokina AT-X 116 Pro DX, 11-16mm f/2.8 SD IF DX

Tokina AT-X 116 Pro DX-II, 11-16mm f/2.8 SD IF DX

Zeiss Otus

Zeiss Otus 55mm f/1.4

NIKON F-MOUNT LENSES

This section describes the appropriate method for attaching and detaching Nikon

F-Mount lenses. For more

information, refer to the original manufacturer’s instructions. This section also lists lenses supported by the

DSMC Nikon F-Mount.

WARNING: ALWAYS protect your equipment, when it is not in use, by replacing lens caps and mount caps.

ATTACH NIKON F-MOUNT LENSES

1. Rotate the secondary locking ring counter-clockwise to disengage.

2. Press the lens release button and rotate the lens cap clockwise to remove the DSMC mount cap.

3. Remove the rear lens cap.

4. Align the mounting index (white dot) on the lens with the mounting index on the DSMC Nikon mount and

position the lens in the bayonet mount.

5. Rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it clicks into place, being careful to NOT press the lens release

button.

6. Rotate the secondary locking ring clockwise to engage.

DETACH NIKON F-MOUNT LENSES

1. Rotate the secondary locking ring counter-clockwise to disengage.

2. Press and hold the lens release button. While holding the lens release button, turn the lens clockwise until

it stops and remove it from the DSMC mount.

3. Replace the rear lens cap and DSMC mount cap when items are not in use.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DSMC NIKON MOUNT SUPPORTED LENSES

The DSMC Nikon Mount electronically supports the following lenses:

COMPATIBLE LENS TYPE FOCAL LENGTH

Nikkor AF AF Nikkor 28mm f/2.8D

AF Nikkor 50mm f/1.8D

AF DX Fisheye-Nikkor 10.5mm f/2.8G ED

AF Fisheye-Nikkor 16mm f/2.8D

Nikkor AF-S AF-S NIkkor 10-24mm f/3.5-4.5G ED IF DX

AF-S Nikkor 14-24mm f/2.8 G ED

AF-S Nikkor 17-35mm f/2.8D ED IF

AF-S Nikkor 17-55mm f/2.8G ED DX

AF-S Nikkor 24mm f/1.4 G ED

AF-S Nikkor 24-70mm f/2.8 G ED

AF-S Nikkor 35mm f/1.4 G

AF-S Nikkor 40mm f/2.8G DX

AF-S Nikkor 50mm f/1.4 G

AF-S Nikkor 70-200mm f/2.8G ED VR II

AF-S Nikkor 85mm f/1.4 G

AF-S Nikkor 200-400mm f/4G VR II

AF-S Nikkor 600mm f/4G ED VR N

AF-S Micro-Nikkor 60mm f/2.8 G ED

AF-S Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G VR IF-ED

Sigma Sigma 17-70mm f/2.8-4 DC Macro OS HSM C

Sigma 18-35mm f/1.8 DC HSM

Sigma 24-105mm f/4 DG OS HSM

Sigma 120-300mm f/2.8 DG OS HSM

Sigma APO Sigma APO 120-300mm f/2.8 EX DG OS HSM

Tamron Tamron SP 24-70mm f2.8 Di VC USD

Tokina Tokina AT-X 107 DX, 10-17mm f/3.5-4.5 Fisheye DX

Tokina AT-X 116 Pro DX, 11-16mm f/2.8 SD IF DX

Tokina AT-X 116 Pro DX-II, 11-16mm f/2.8 SD IF DX

Zeiss Distagon

Zeiss Distagon T* 21mm f/2.8 ZF.2

Zeiss Distagon T* 35mm f/1.4 ZF.2

Zeiss Planar Zeiss Planar T* 50mm f/1.4 ZF.2

Zeiss Planar T* 85mm f/1.4 ZF.2

1. Iris control only, no AF.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 218

AL LEICA-M MOUNT LENSES

This section describes the appropriate method for attaching and detaching Leica-M

lenses. For more

information, refer to the original manufacturer’s instructions. This section also lists lenses supported by the

DSMC AL Leica-M Mount.

WARNING: ALWAYS protect your equipment, when it is not in use, by replacing lens caps and mount caps.

ATTACH LEICA-M LENSES

1. Rotate the locking ring counter-clockwise to release the DSMC mount cap.

2. Remove the rear lens cap and the DSMC mount cap.

3. Align the mounting index (white dot) on the lens with the mounting index on the DSMC AL Leica-M mount.

4. Insert the lens into the DSMC AL Leica-M mount.

5. Rotate the locking ring clockwise to secure the lens in place.

DETACH LEICA-M LENSES

1. Rotate the locking ring counter-clockwise to release the Leica-M lens.

2. Remove the Leica-M lens from the DSMC AL Leica-M mount.

3. Replace the rear lens cap and DSMC mount cap when the lens is not in use.

DSMC AL LEICA-M MOUNT SUPPORTED LENSES

The DSMC AL Leica-M Mount is compatible with most Leica M-series lenses with focal lengths of 50mm and

greater, EXCEPT for the 50mm f2.0 Dual-Range Summicron. The 50mm f2.0 Dual-Range Summicron has a

protruding lug on the exterior of the lens body for mounting a supplementary finder. This lug interferes with

the locking ring on the DSMC AL Leica-M Mount. Most Leica lenses with focal lengths of less than 50mm will

encounter mechanical interference between the rear lens cell and the camera’s front panel.

EPIC DRAGON AND SCARLET DRAGON

If you are using an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON

camera, you do not need to install a new OLPF

frame. You can attach most Leica-M lenses without causing any interference with camera.

EPIC MYSTERIUM-X AND SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X

If you are using an EPIC MYSTERIUM-X

or SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X camera, you need to install a new OLPF

frame (included with the DSMC AL Leica-M Mount). Leica-M lenses are incompatible with older models of the

OLPF frame originally installed in the EPIC MYSTERIUM-X and SCARLET MYSTERIUM-X.

For more information, go to OLPF Frame Installation Instructions available at www.red.com/downloads.

WARNING: Attempting to mount Leica lenses of focal lengths of less than 50mm could result in damage to the

lens and/or the camera.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 219

DEFAULT KEY FUNCTIONS

ITEM KEY FUNCTION

Camera BRAIN

Record Full Press Record: Toggle

GPI In High Record: Start

GPI In Low Record: Stop

Side SSD Module Record Full Press Record: Toggle/Multi-Shot Start

Record Full Release Record: Multi-Shot Stop

Record Half Press AF: Start

User 1+2 Press Eject Media

LCD (BRAIN and Rear) Up Press Br. Up (Increase Brightness)

Down Press Br. Down (Decrease Brightness)

User 1 Press Magnify: Toggle

User 2 Press Exposure Check: Toggle

User 1+2 Press LCD: Toggle Lock

EVF (BRAIN and Rear) User 1 Press Magnify: Toggle

User 2 Press Exposure Check: Toggle

DEFAULT KEY

FUNCTIONS

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 220

DEFAULT KEY FUNCTIONS

ITEM KEY FUNCTION

DSMC

Side Handle User A Press AF Mode: Cycle

User B Press WB: Auto Calc

User C Press Magnify: Toggle

User D Press Exposure Check: Toggle

User 1 Press SH: Key 1

User 2 Press SH: Key 2

User 3 Press SH: Key 3

User 4 Press SH: Key 4

User 5 Press Exposure Check: Toggle

User 6 Press Key Disabled

User 7 Press Eject Media

User 1+4 Press SM: Toggle Key Lock

Nav Menu Press Navigation: Menu

Nav North Press Navigation: Up

Nav South Press Navigation: Down

Nav East Press Navigation: Right

Nav West Press Navigation: Left

Nav Enter Press Navigation: Select

Backlight Press SH: Toggle Backlight

Movie Select Focus Mode: Motion

Still Select Focus Mode: Still

Record Full Press Record: Toggle/Multi-Shot Start

Record Full Release Record: Multi-Shot Stop

Record Half Press AF: Start

Rocker + Press Iris: Open

Rocker - Press Iris: Close

Rotary Front CW Navigation: CW

Rotary Front CCW Navigation: CCW

Rotary Jog CW Navigation: CW

Rotary Jog CCW Navigation: CCW

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

DEFAULT KEY FUNCTIONS

ITEM KEY FUNCTION

RED

Switchblade-M User A Press AF Mode: Cycle

User B Press WB: Auto Calc

User C Press Magnify: Toggle

User D Press Exposure Check: Toggle

User A+D Press SM: Toggle Key Lock

Nav Menu Press Navigation: Menu

Nav North Press Navigation: Up

Nav South Press Navigation: Down

Nav East Press Navigation: Right

Nav West Press Navigation: Left

Nav Enter Press Navigation: Select

Rotary Front CW Navigation: CW

Rotary Front CCW Navigation: CCW

REDMOTE

User A Press AF Mode: Cycle

User B Press WB: Auto Calc

User C Press Magnify: Toggle

User D Press Exposure Check: Toggle

Still Select Focus Mode: Still

Movie Select Focus Mode: Motion

Nav Menu Press Navigation: Menu

Nav North Press Navigation: Up

Nav South Press Navigation: Down

Nav East Press Navigation: Right

Nav West Press Navigation: Left

Nav Enter Press Navigation: Select

Rotary Front CW Navigation: CW

Rotary Front CCW Navigation: CCW

Record Full Press Record: Toggle/Multi-Shot Start

Record Full Release Record: Multi-Shot Stop

Record Half Press AF: Start

Rocker + Press Iris: Open

Rocker - Press Iris: Closed

PRO I/O GPIO GPI A LOW Record: Toggle

GPI B Low Record: Toggle

SW 1 Low Go to: Playback

SW 2 Low Record: Toggle

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 222

PRESET DEFAULT KEY FUNCTIONS

The following table describes default key functions for the Default Stills and Motion presets.

NOTE: You cannot update factory-installed presets, which end with “(RED)”.

PRESET DEFAULT KEY FUNCTIONS

ITEM KEY FUNCTION

Default Stills Preset (RED) User A Press Record: Mark Frame

User B Press Playback/Preview: Toggle

User C Press Magnify: Toggle

Record Half Press AE/AF: Start

Rocker + Press Iris Open

Rocker - Press Iris Close

Rotary Front Increment/Decrement Value

User 1 Press

SH: Key 1

User 2 Press

SH: Key 2

User 3 Press

SH: Key 3

User 4 Press

SH: Key 4

User 1+4 Press Toggle Key Lock

Default Motion Preset (RED) User A Press AF Mode: Cycle

User B Press WB: Auto Calc

User C Press Magnify Toggle

User D Press Exposure Check: Toggle

Rocker + Press Iris Open

Rocker - Press Iris Close

Rotary Front Increment/Decrement Value

User 1 Press

SH: Key 1

User 2 Press

SH: Key 2

User 3 Press

SH: Key 3

User 4 Press

SH: Key 4

User 1+4 Press Toggle Key Lock

1. User 1-4 keys are soft keys used to select a slot. The front rotary then adjusts the value of the selected slot.

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 223

See the menu map on the following page.

The menu map is applicable to the following

cameras, except as noted throughout this guide:

 EPIC-M RED DRAGON™ (CARBON FIBER)

 EPIC-M RED DRAGON

 EPIC-X RED DRAGON

 SCARLET DRAGON

 EPIC-M MYSTERIUM-X

 EPIC-X MYSTERIUM-X

 SCARLET-X MYSTERIUM-X

 EPIC-M MONOCHROME

 EPIC-X MONOCHROME

 EPIC-M RED DRAGON MONOCHROME

MAP

RED DSMC OPERATION GUIDE: EPIC/SCARLET

955-0020_V6.0, REV-G | 224

} Mode

} Factor

} Monitor Track

HDRX

} Mode

} Rack

FOCUS

} Camera Presets

} Looks

} Auto Presets

PRESETS

} Power In

} Power Save

} Shutdown

POWER

} Playback Screen

PLAYBACK

} Device

} Clips

MEDIASETTINGS

} Mode

} Exposure Priority

} Exp Comp

} Metering Mode

} Speed

} Selection

EXPOSURE

ASSIST

Tools

} False Color

} Magnify

} RAW

} Horizon

Zebra

} Zebra 1 and 2

Monitor Control

} Monitor

} Overlays

} LUTs

} Priority

} Brightness

} Advanced

Modes

} Camera

} Lens

Guides

} Frame Guide

} Action Guide

} Title Guide

} General

Test Signals

} Off

} Chip Chart

} SMPTE Bars

} Luma Ramp

} Audio Tone

REDCAST

} Output

} Genlock

} Video Reset

DISPLAY

Color

} Saturation

} Contrast

} Brightness

} Exposure

Gain

} Red

} Green

} Blue

ISO/FLUT

} ISO

} FLUT

} Shadow

Sharpness

} Output

Sharpness

Curves

} Luma

} Red

} Green

} Blue

Color/Gamma

} Independent

Display LUT

} ACES Proxy

} Color Space

} Graded Gamma

Space

Color Temp

} Color

Temperature

} Tint

} Auto White

Balance

LGG

} Lift

} Gamma

} Gain

LOOK

Frame Rate

} Recording Frame

Rate

} Project Time

Base

Exposure

} Integration

Time

} Shutter Angle

Timcode

} Timecode

Display

} Source

} LTC Out

Slate

} Scene

} Camera

} Project

} Auto Slate

Format

} Format

} Anamorphic

} UHD

PROJECT

Channel

} Channel

} Source

} Link

} Name

} Mode

} 48V Power

} Limiter

Pre-Amp

} CAM ANALOG

} NONE

Headphone

} Cam Left

} Cam Right

Cam Mix

} CAM ANALOG

} NONE

Rear Mix

} CAM ANALOG

} NONE

Monitor Mix

} CAM ANALOG

} NONE

AUDIO

Mode

} Storage

} Mode

Frame

Processing

} Mode

} Number of

Frames

Pre-Record

} Pre-Record

Duration

} Trigger

Pre-Record Now

Indicator

} Enable Sounds

} EVF Tally Light

RECORDING

Keys

} Key Mapping

} Options

} Soft Keys

} Advanced

Date/Time

} Date

} Local Time

} Time Zone

Communication

} Camera

} Serial

} Ethernet

} WiFi

} RCP

REDMOTE

} Discovered

} Paired

} Wireless Enable

} Wireless Channel

GPIO/Sync

} Sync

} Brain GPIO

} Pro I/O GPI

} Pro I/O SW

Fan Control

} Mode

} Maximum

Record Speed

} Maximum

Preview Speed

} Target

Temperature

} Post Record

Delay

Lens

} Lens

} Motion Mount

Motor Control

} General

} Focus

} Iris

} Zoom

} Wireless

SETUP

Save Log

} Save Camera

Log to Media

Upgrade

} Camera

} REDMOTE

} Media

Calibrate

} Sensor

} Gyro/Acc

} Lens

Self Test

} Enable Sensor

Test Pattern

} Touchscreen

Restore System

} Reset Factory

Defaults

Rediscover

} Hardware

Discovery

System Status

} Project Status

} Module Status

} Camera Info

} Media Info

OLPF

} Type

MAINTENANCE

1. Only available when a REDCAST™ Module is attached.

2. Not available on any BRAIN with a MONOCHROME or RED DRAGON MONOCHROME sensor.

3. Only available when a MOTION MOUNT is attached.

4. Only available on an EPIC DRAGON or SCARLET DRAGON.

RED DIGITAL CINEMA

All trademarks, trade names, logos, icons, images, written material, code and product names used in

association with the accompanying product are the copyrights, trademarks or other intellectual property owned

and controlled exclusively by RED.COM, INC.

Red Epic - 2015 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info